xref: /vim-8.2.3635/src/misc1.c (revision 2df6dcc5)
1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
2  *
3  * VIM - Vi IMproved	by Bram Moolenaar
4  *
5  * Do ":help uganda"  in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
6  * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
7  * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
8  */
9 
10 /*
11  * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere
12  */
13 
14 #include "vim.h"
15 #include "version.h"
16 
17 #ifdef HAVE_FCNTL_H
18 # include <fcntl.h>		/* for chdir() */
19 #endif
20 
21 static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir));
22 static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name));
23 #if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
24 static char_u *remove_tail_with_ext __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *ext));
25 #endif
26 static int get_indent_str __ARGS((char_u *ptr, int ts));
27 static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u	*src));
28 
29 /*
30  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line.
31  */
32     int
33 get_indent()
34 {
35     return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
36 }
37 
38 /*
39  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum".
40  */
41     int
42 get_indent_lnum(lnum)
43     linenr_T	lnum;
44 {
45     return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
46 }
47 
48 #if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO)
49 /*
50  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer
51  * "buf".
52  */
53     int
54 get_indent_buf(buf, lnum)
55     buf_T	*buf;
56     linenr_T	lnum;
57 {
58     return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts);
59 }
60 #endif
61 
62 /*
63  * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with
64  * 'tabstop' at "ts"
65  */
66     static int
67 get_indent_str(ptr, ts)
68     char_u	*ptr;
69     int		ts;
70 {
71     int		count = 0;
72 
73     for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr)
74     {
75 	if (*ptr == TAB)    /* count a tab for what it is worth */
76 	    count += ts - (count % ts);
77 	else if (*ptr == ' ')
78 	    ++count;		/* count a space for one */
79 	else
80 	    break;
81     }
82     return (count);
83 }
84 
85 /*
86  * Set the indent of the current line.
87  * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
88  * Caller must take care of undo.
89  * "flags":
90  *	SIN_CHANGED:	call changed_bytes() if the line was changed.
91  *	SIN_INSERT:	insert the indent in front of the line.
92  *	SIN_UNDO:	save line for undo before changing it.
93  * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
94  */
95     int
96 set_indent(size, flags)
97     int		size;
98     int		flags;
99 {
100     char_u	*p;
101     char_u	*newline;
102     char_u	*oldline;
103     char_u	*s;
104     int		todo;
105     int		ind_len;
106     int		line_len;
107     int		doit = FALSE;
108     int		ind_done;
109     int		tab_pad;
110 
111     /*
112      * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of
113      * characters needed for the indent.
114      */
115     todo = size;
116     ind_len = 0;
117     p = oldline = ml_get_curline();
118 
119     /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it
120      * isn't already set */
121 
122     /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
123     if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
124     {
125 	/* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
126 	 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
127 	if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
128 	{
129 	    ind_done = 0;
130 
131 	    /* count as many characters as we can use */
132 	    while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
133 	    {
134 		if (*p == TAB)
135 		{
136 		    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
137 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
138 		    /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
139 		    if (todo < tab_pad)
140 			break;
141 		    todo -= tab_pad;
142 		    ++ind_len;
143 		    ind_done += tab_pad;
144 		}
145 		else
146 		{
147 		    --todo;
148 		    ++ind_len;
149 		    ++ind_done;
150 		}
151 		++p;
152 	    }
153 
154 	    /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
155 	    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
156 	    if (todo >= tab_pad)
157 	    {
158 		doit = TRUE;
159 		todo -= tab_pad;
160 		++ind_len;
161 		/* ind_done += tab_pad; */
162 	    }
163 	}
164 
165 	/* count tabs required for indent */
166 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
167 	{
168 	    if (*p != TAB)
169 		doit = TRUE;
170 	    else
171 		++p;
172 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
173 	    ++ind_len;
174 	    /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */
175 	}
176     }
177     /* count spaces required for indent */
178     while (todo > 0)
179     {
180 	if (*p != ' ')
181 	    doit = TRUE;
182 	else
183 	    ++p;
184 	--todo;
185 	++ind_len;
186 	/* ++ind_done; */
187     }
188 
189     /* Return if the indent is OK already. */
190     if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT))
191 	return FALSE;
192 
193     /* Allocate memory for the new line. */
194     if (flags & SIN_INSERT)
195 	p = oldline;
196     else
197 	p = skipwhite(p);
198     line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1;
199     newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
200     if (newline == NULL)
201 	return FALSE;
202 
203     /* Put the characters in the new line. */
204     s = newline;
205     todo = size;
206     /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
207     if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
208     {
209 	/* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
210 	 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
211 	if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
212 	{
213 	    p = oldline;
214 	    ind_done = 0;
215 
216 	    while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
217 	    {
218 		if (*p == TAB)
219 		{
220 		    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
221 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
222 		    /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
223 		    if (todo < tab_pad)
224 			break;
225 		    todo -= tab_pad;
226 		    ind_done += tab_pad;
227 		}
228 		else
229 		{
230 		    --todo;
231 		    ++ind_done;
232 		}
233 		*s++ = *p++;
234 	    }
235 
236 	    /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
237 	    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
238 	    if (todo >= tab_pad)
239 	    {
240 		*s++ = TAB;
241 		todo -= tab_pad;
242 	    }
243 
244 	    p = skipwhite(p);
245 	}
246 
247 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
248 	{
249 	    *s++ = TAB;
250 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
251 	}
252     }
253     while (todo > 0)
254     {
255 	*s++ = ' ';
256 	--todo;
257     }
258     mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len);
259 
260     /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */
261     if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK)
262     {
263 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE);
264 	if (flags & SIN_CHANGED)
265 	    changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
266 	/* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */
267 	if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum
268 				&& saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline))
269 	    saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (p - oldline);
270     }
271     else
272 	vim_free(newline);
273 
274     curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
275     return TRUE;
276 }
277 
278 /*
279  * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size)
280  * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
281  * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
282  */
283     static int
284 copy_indent(size, src)
285     int		size;
286     char_u	*src;
287 {
288     char_u	*p = NULL;
289     char_u	*line = NULL;
290     char_u	*s;
291     int		todo;
292     int		ind_len;
293     int		line_len = 0;
294     int		tab_pad;
295     int		ind_done;
296     int		round;
297 
298     /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent
299      * Round 2: copy the characters. */
300     for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round)
301     {
302 	todo = size;
303 	ind_len = 0;
304 	ind_done = 0;
305 	s = src;
306 
307 	/* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */
308 	while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s))
309 	{
310 	    if (*s == TAB)
311 	    {
312 		tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
313 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
314 		/* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
315 		if (todo < tab_pad)
316 		    break;
317 		todo -= tab_pad;
318 		ind_done += tab_pad;
319 	    }
320 	    else
321 	    {
322 		--todo;
323 		++ind_done;
324 	    }
325 	    ++ind_len;
326 	    if (round == 2)
327 		*p++ = *s;
328 	    ++s;
329 	}
330 
331 	/* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
332 	tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
333 	if (todo >= tab_pad)
334 	{
335 	    todo -= tab_pad;
336 	    ++ind_len;
337 	    if (round == 2)
338 		*p++ = TAB;
339 	}
340 
341 	/* Add tabs required for indent */
342 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
343 	{
344 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
345 	    ++ind_len;
346 	    if (round == 2)
347 		*p++ = TAB;
348 	}
349 
350 	/* Count/add spaces required for indent */
351 	while (todo > 0)
352 	{
353 	    --todo;
354 	    ++ind_len;
355 	    if (round == 2)
356 		*p++ = ' ';
357 	}
358 
359 	if (round == 1)
360 	{
361 	    /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent
362 	     * and the rest of the line. */
363 	    line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1;
364 	    line = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
365 	    if (line == NULL)
366 		return FALSE;
367 	    p = line;
368 	}
369     }
370 
371     /* Append the original line */
372     mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len);
373 
374     /* Replace the line */
375     ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE);
376 
377     /* Put the cursor after the indent. */
378     curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
379     return TRUE;
380 }
381 
382 /*
383  * Return the indent of the current line after a number.  Return -1 if no
384  * number was found.  Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list.
385  */
386     int
387 get_number_indent(lnum)
388     linenr_T	lnum;
389 {
390     char_u	*line;
391     char_u	*p;
392     colnr_T	col;
393     pos_T	pos;
394 
395     if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
396 	return -1;
397     line = ml_get(lnum);
398     p = skipwhite(line);
399     if (!VIM_ISDIGIT(*p))
400 	return -1;
401     p = skipdigits(p);
402     if (vim_strchr((char_u *)":.)]}\t ", *p) == NULL)
403 	return -1;
404     p = skipwhite(p + 1);
405     if (*p == NUL)
406 	return -1;
407     pos.lnum = lnum;
408     pos.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
409     getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
410     return (int)col;
411 }
412 
413 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT)
414 
415 static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line));
416 
417 /*
418  * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'.
419  */
420     static int
421 cin_is_cinword(line)
422     char_u	*line;
423 {
424     char_u	*cinw;
425     char_u	*cinw_buf;
426     int		cinw_len;
427     int		retval = FALSE;
428     int		len;
429 
430     cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1;
431     cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len);
432     if (cinw_buf != NULL)
433     {
434 	line = skipwhite(line);
435 	for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; )
436 	{
437 	    len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ",");
438 	    if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0
439 		    && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1])))
440 	    {
441 		retval = TRUE;
442 		break;
443 	    }
444 	}
445 	vim_free(cinw_buf);
446     }
447     return retval;
448 }
449 #endif
450 
451 /*
452  * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line.
453  *
454  * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the
455  * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line.
456  *
457  * Caller must take care of undo.  Since VREPLACE may affect any number of
458  * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a
459  * new line.
460  * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES	delete spaces after cursor
461  *	    OPENLINE_DO_COM	format comments
462  *	    OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL	keep trailing spaces
463  *	    OPENLINE_MARKFIX	adjust mark positions after the line break
464  *
465  * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure
466  */
467     int
468 open_line(dir, flags, old_indent)
469     int		dir;		/* FORWARD or BACKWARD */
470     int		flags;
471     int		old_indent;	/* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */
472 {
473     char_u	*saved_line;		/* copy of the original line */
474     char_u	*next_line = NULL;	/* copy of the next line */
475     char_u	*p_extra = NULL;	/* what goes to next line */
476     int		less_cols = 0;		/* less columns for mark in new line */
477     int		less_cols_off = 0;	/* columns to skip for mark adjust */
478     pos_T	old_cursor;		/* old cursor position */
479     int		newcol = 0;		/* new cursor column */
480     int		newindent = 0;		/* auto-indent of the new line */
481     int		n;
482     int		trunc_line = FALSE;	/* truncate current line afterwards */
483     int		retval = FALSE;		/* return value, default is FAIL */
484 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
485     int		extra_len = 0;		/* length of p_extra string */
486     int		lead_len;		/* length of comment leader */
487     char_u	*lead_flags;	/* position in 'comments' for comment leader */
488     char_u	*leader = NULL;		/* copy of comment leader */
489 #endif
490     char_u	*allocated = NULL;	/* allocated memory */
491 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \
492 	|| defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
493     char_u	*p;
494 #endif
495     int		saved_char = NUL;	/* init for GCC */
496 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
497     pos_T	*pos;
498 #endif
499 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
500     int		do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si
501 # ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
502 					&& !curbuf->b_p_cin
503 # endif
504 			);
505     int		no_si = FALSE;		/* reset did_si afterwards */
506     int		first_char = NUL;	/* init for GCC */
507 #endif
508 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
509     int		vreplace_mode;
510 #endif
511     int		did_append;		/* appended a new line */
512     int		saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */
513 
514     /*
515      * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it
516      */
517     saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
518     if (saved_line == NULL)	    /* out of memory! */
519 	return FALSE;
520 
521 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
522     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
523     {
524 	/*
525 	 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be
526 	 * starting to replace.  First make the new line empty and let vim play
527 	 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content.  Then
528 	 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the
529 	 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto
530 	 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right
531 	 * stuff onto the replace stack.  -- webb.
532 	 */
533 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count)
534 	    next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1));
535 	else
536 	    next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
537 	if (next_line == NULL)	    /* out of memory! */
538 	    goto theend;
539 
540 	/*
541 	 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts
542 	 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the
543 	 * line onto the replace stack.  We'll push any other characters that
544 	 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent
545 	 * etc) a bit later.
546 	 */
547 	replace_push(NUL);  /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */
548 	replace_push(NUL);
549 	p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
550 	while (*p != NUL)
551 	    replace_push(*p++);
552 	saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
553     }
554 #endif
555 
556     if ((State & INSERT)
557 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
558 	    && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
559 #endif
560 	    )
561     {
562 	p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
563 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
564 	if (do_si)		/* need first char after new line break */
565 	{
566 	    p = skipwhite(p_extra);
567 	    first_char = *p;
568 	}
569 #endif
570 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
571 	extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra);
572 #endif
573 	saved_char = *p_extra;
574 	*p_extra = NUL;
575     }
576 
577     u_clearline();		/* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */
578 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
579     did_si = FALSE;
580 #endif
581     ai_col = 0;
582 
583     /*
584      * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on
585      * the prior line, and it should be truncated.  Do this even if 'ai' is not
586      * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai.
587      */
588     if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai)
589 	trunc_line = TRUE;
590 
591     /*
592      * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what
593      * indent to use for the new line.
594      */
595     if (curbuf->b_p_ai
596 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
597 			|| do_si
598 #endif
599 					    )
600     {
601 	/*
602 	 * count white space on current line
603 	 */
604 	newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
605 	if (newindent == 0)
606 	    newindent = old_indent;	/* for ^^D command in insert mode */
607 
608 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
609 	/*
610 	 * Do smart indenting.
611 	 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD)
612 	 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{'
613 	 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line
614 	 *	"if (condition) {"
615 	 */
616 	if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL
617 				    && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{'))
618 	{
619 	    char_u  *ptr;
620 	    char_u  last_char;
621 
622 	    old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
623 	    ptr = saved_line;
624 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
625 	    if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
626 		lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
627 	    else
628 		lead_len = 0;
629 # endif
630 	    if (dir == FORWARD)
631 	    {
632 		/*
633 		 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
634 		 * recognised as comments.
635 		 */
636 		if (
637 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
638 			lead_len == 0 &&
639 # endif
640 			ptr[0] == '#')
641 		{
642 		    while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
643 			ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
644 		    newindent = get_indent();
645 		}
646 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
647 		if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
648 		    lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
649 		else
650 		    lead_len = 0;
651 		if (lead_len > 0)
652 		{
653 		    /*
654 		     * This case gets the following right:
655 		     *	    \*
656 		     *	     * A comment (read '\' as '/').
657 		     *	     *\
658 		     * #define IN_THE_WAY
659 		     *	    This should line up here;
660 		     */
661 		    p = skipwhite(ptr);
662 		    if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*')
663 			p++;
664 		    if (p[0] == '*')
665 		    {
666 			for (p++; *p; p++)
667 			{
668 			    if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*')
669 			    {
670 				/*
671 				 * End of C comment, indent should line up
672 				 * with the line containing the start of
673 				 * the comment
674 				 */
675 				curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
676 				if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
677 				{
678 				    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
679 				    newindent = get_indent();
680 				}
681 			    }
682 			}
683 		    }
684 		}
685 		else	/* Not a comment line */
686 # endif
687 		{
688 		    /* Find last non-blank in line */
689 		    p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1;
690 		    while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
691 			--p;
692 		    last_char = *p;
693 
694 		    /*
695 		     * find the character just before the '{' or ';'
696 		     */
697 		    if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';')
698 		    {
699 			if (p > ptr)
700 			    --p;
701 			while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
702 			    --p;
703 		    }
704 		    /*
705 		     * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple
706 		     * lines.  eg:
707 		     *	    if (condition &&
708 		     *			condition) {
709 		     *		Should line up here!
710 		     *	    }
711 		     */
712 		    if (*p == ')')
713 		    {
714 			curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
715 			if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL)
716 			{
717 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
718 			    newindent = get_indent();
719 			    ptr = ml_get_curline();
720 			}
721 		    }
722 		    /*
723 		     * If last character is '{' do indent, without
724 		     * checking for "if" and the like.
725 		     */
726 		    if (last_char == '{')
727 		    {
728 			did_si = TRUE;	/* do indent */
729 			no_si = TRUE;	/* don't delete it when '{' typed */
730 		    }
731 		    /*
732 		     * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'.
733 		     * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or
734 		     * '}'.
735 		     */
736 		    else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}'
737 						       && cin_is_cinword(ptr))
738 			did_si = TRUE;
739 		}
740 	    }
741 	    else /* dir == BACKWARD */
742 	    {
743 		/*
744 		 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
745 		 * recognised as comments.
746 		 */
747 		if (
748 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
749 			lead_len == 0 &&
750 # endif
751 			ptr[0] == '#')
752 		{
753 		    int was_backslashed = FALSE;
754 
755 		    while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) &&
756 			 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
757 		    {
758 			if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\')
759 			    was_backslashed = TRUE;
760 			else
761 			    was_backslashed = FALSE;
762 			ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
763 		    }
764 		    if (was_backslashed)
765 			newindent = 0;	    /* Got to end of file */
766 		    else
767 			newindent = get_indent();
768 		}
769 		p = skipwhite(ptr);
770 		if (*p == '}')	    /* if line starts with '}': do indent */
771 		    did_si = TRUE;
772 		else		    /* can delete indent when '{' typed */
773 		    can_si_back = TRUE;
774 	    }
775 	    curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
776 	}
777 	if (do_si)
778 	    can_si = TRUE;
779 #endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */
780 
781 	did_ai = TRUE;
782     }
783 
784 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
785     /*
786      * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader.
787      * This may then be inserted in front of the new line.
788      */
789     end_comment_pending = NUL;
790     if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
791 	lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD);
792     else
793 	lead_len = 0;
794     if (lead_len > 0)
795     {
796 	char_u	*lead_repl = NULL;	    /* replaces comment leader */
797 	int	lead_repl_len = 0;	    /* length of *lead_repl */
798 	char_u	lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN];   /* middle-comment string */
799 	char_u	lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN];	    /* end-comment string */
800 	char_u	*comment_end = NULL;	    /* where lead_end has been found */
801 	int	extra_space = FALSE;	    /* append extra space */
802 	int	current_flag;
803 	int	require_blank = FALSE;	    /* requires blank after middle */
804 	char_u	*p2;
805 
806 	/*
807 	 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not
808 	 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader.
809 	 */
810 	for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
811 	{
812 	    if (*p == COM_BLANK)
813 	    {
814 		require_blank = TRUE;
815 		continue;
816 	    }
817 	    if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
818 	    {
819 		current_flag = *p;
820 		if (*p == COM_START)
821 		{
822 		    /*
823 		     * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader.
824 		     */
825 		    if (dir == BACKWARD)
826 		    {
827 			lead_len = 0;
828 			break;
829 		    }
830 
831 		    /* find start of middle part */
832 		    (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
833 		    require_blank = FALSE;
834 		}
835 
836 		/*
837 		 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader.
838 		 */
839 		while (*p && p[-1] != ':')	/* find end of middle flags */
840 		{
841 		    if (*p == COM_BLANK)
842 			require_blank = TRUE;
843 		    ++p;
844 		}
845 		(void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
846 
847 		while (*p && p[-1] != ':')	/* find end of end flags */
848 		{
849 		    /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
850 		    if (*p == COM_AUTO_END)
851 			end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
852 		    ++p;
853 		}
854 		n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
855 
856 		if (end_comment_pending == -1)	/* we can set it now */
857 		    end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1];
858 
859 		/*
860 		 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use
861 		 * the comment leader.
862 		 */
863 		if (dir == FORWARD)
864 		{
865 		    for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p)
866 			if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0)
867 			{
868 			    comment_end = p;
869 			    lead_len = 0;
870 			    break;
871 			}
872 		}
873 
874 		/*
875 		 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader.
876 		 */
877 		if (lead_len > 0)
878 		{
879 		    if (current_flag == COM_START)
880 		    {
881 			lead_repl = lead_middle;
882 			lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
883 		    }
884 
885 		    /*
886 		     * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start
887 		     * comment leader, then put a space after the middle
888 		     * comment leader on the next line.
889 		     */
890 		    if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1])
891 			    && ((p_extra != NULL
892 				    && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len)
893 				|| (p_extra == NULL
894 				    && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL)
895 				|| require_blank))
896 			extra_space = TRUE;
897 		}
898 		break;
899 	    }
900 	    if (*p == COM_END)
901 	    {
902 		/*
903 		 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader.
904 		 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the
905 		 * start (for C-comments).
906 		 */
907 		if (dir == FORWARD)
908 		{
909 		    comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line);
910 		    lead_len = 0;
911 		    break;
912 		}
913 
914 		/*
915 		 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader.
916 		 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards.
917 		 */
918 		while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',')
919 		    --p;
920 		for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com
921 					 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl)
922 		    ;
923 		lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl);
924 
925 		/* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on
926 		 * the comment-end */
927 		extra_space = TRUE;
928 
929 		/* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
930 		for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++)
931 		{
932 		    if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END)
933 			end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
934 		}
935 		if (end_comment_pending == -1)
936 		{
937 		    /* Find last character in end-comment string */
938 		    while (*p2 && *p2 != ',')
939 			p2++;
940 		    end_comment_pending = p2[-1];
941 		}
942 		break;
943 	    }
944 	    if (*p == COM_FIRST)
945 	    {
946 		/*
947 		 * Comment leader for first line only:	Don't repeat leader
948 		 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o".
949 		 */
950 		if (dir == BACKWARD)
951 		    lead_len = 0;
952 		else
953 		{
954 		    lead_repl = (char_u *)"";
955 		    lead_repl_len = 0;
956 		}
957 		break;
958 	    }
959 	}
960 	if (lead_len)
961 	{
962 	    /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */
963 	    leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space +
964 							      extra_len + 1);
965 	    allocated = leader;		    /* remember to free it later */
966 
967 	    if (leader == NULL)
968 		lead_len = 0;
969 	    else
970 	    {
971 		STRNCPY(leader, saved_line, lead_len);
972 		leader[lead_len] = NUL;
973 
974 		/*
975 		 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted
976 		 */
977 		if (lead_repl != NULL)
978 		{
979 		    int		c = 0;
980 		    int		off = 0;
981 
982 		    for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
983 		    {
984 			if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT)
985 			    c = *p;
986 			else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
987 			    off = getdigits(&p);
988 		    }
989 		    if (c == COM_RIGHT)    /* right adjusted leader */
990 		    {
991 			/* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */
992 			for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader
993 						      && vim_iswhite(*p); --p)
994 			    ;
995 
996 			++p;
997 			if (p < leader + lead_repl_len)
998 			    p = leader;
999 			else
1000 			    p -= lead_repl_len;
1001 			mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1002 			if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len)
1003 			    p[lead_repl_len] = NUL;
1004 
1005 			/* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */
1006 			while (--p >= leader)
1007 			    if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1008 				*p = ' ';
1009 		    }
1010 		    else		    /* left adjusted leader */
1011 		    {
1012 			p = skipwhite(leader);
1013 			mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1014 
1015 			/* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old
1016 			 * leader by spaces.  Keep Tabs, the indent must
1017 			 * remain the same. */
1018 			for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p)
1019 			    if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1020 			    {
1021 				/* Don't put a space before a TAB. */
1022 				if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB)
1023 				{
1024 				    --lead_len;
1025 				    mch_memmove(p, p + 1,
1026 						     (leader + lead_len) - p);
1027 				}
1028 				else
1029 				    *p = ' ';
1030 			    }
1031 			*p = NUL;
1032 		    }
1033 
1034 		    /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */
1035 		    if (curbuf->b_p_ai
1036 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1037 					|| do_si
1038 #endif
1039 							   )
1040 			newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
1041 
1042 		    /* Add the indent offset */
1043 		    if (newindent + off < 0)
1044 		    {
1045 			off = -newindent;
1046 			newindent = 0;
1047 		    }
1048 		    else
1049 			newindent += off;
1050 
1051 		    /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that
1052 		     * alignment remains equal. */
1053 		    while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0
1054 					       && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ')
1055 		    {
1056 			/* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */
1057 			if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL)
1058 			    break;
1059 			--lead_len;
1060 			--off;
1061 		    }
1062 
1063 		    /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an
1064 		     * extra space */
1065 		    if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1]))
1066 			extra_space = FALSE;
1067 		    leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1068 		}
1069 
1070 		if (extra_space)
1071 		{
1072 		    leader[lead_len++] = ' ';
1073 		    leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1074 		}
1075 
1076 		newcol = lead_len;
1077 
1078 		/*
1079 		 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that
1080 		 * is in the comment leader
1081 		 */
1082 		if (newindent
1083 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1084 				|| did_si
1085 #endif
1086 					   )
1087 		{
1088 		    while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader))
1089 		    {
1090 			--lead_len;
1091 			--newcol;
1092 			++leader;
1093 		    }
1094 		}
1095 
1096 	    }
1097 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1098 	    did_si = can_si = FALSE;
1099 #endif
1100 	}
1101 	else if (comment_end != NULL)
1102 	{
1103 	    /*
1104 	     * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader.
1105 	     * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal
1106 	     * indent to align with the line containing the start of the
1107 	     * comment.
1108 	     */
1109 	    if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' &&
1110 			(curbuf->b_p_ai
1111 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1112 					|| do_si
1113 #endif
1114 							   ))
1115 	    {
1116 		old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1117 		curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line);
1118 		if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
1119 		{
1120 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
1121 		    newindent = get_indent();
1122 		}
1123 		curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1124 	    }
1125 	}
1126     }
1127 #endif
1128 
1129     /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */
1130     if (p_extra != NULL)
1131     {
1132 	*p_extra = saved_char;		/* restore char that NUL replaced */
1133 
1134 	/*
1135 	 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first
1136 	 * non-blank.
1137 	 *
1138 	 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack,
1139 	 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered.
1140 	 */
1141 	if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1142 	    replace_push(NUL);	    /* end of extra blanks */
1143 	if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES))
1144 	{
1145 	    while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t')
1146 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1147 		    && (!enc_utf8
1148 			       || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1)))
1149 #endif
1150 		    )
1151 	    {
1152 		if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1153 		    replace_push(*p_extra);
1154 		++p_extra;
1155 		++less_cols_off;
1156 	    }
1157 	}
1158 	if (*p_extra != NUL)
1159 	    did_ai = FALSE;	    /* append some text, don't truncate now */
1160 
1161 	/* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */
1162 	less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line);
1163     }
1164 
1165     if (p_extra == NULL)
1166 	p_extra = (char_u *)"";		    /* append empty line */
1167 
1168 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1169     /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */
1170     if (lead_len)
1171     {
1172 	STRCAT(leader, p_extra);
1173 	p_extra = leader;
1174 	did_ai = TRUE;	    /* So truncating blanks works with comments */
1175 	less_cols -= lead_len;
1176     }
1177     else
1178 	end_comment_pending = NUL;  /* turns out there was no leader */
1179 #endif
1180 
1181     old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1182     if (dir == BACKWARD)
1183 	--curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1184 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1185     if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count)
1186 #endif
1187     {
1188 	if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE)
1189 								      == FAIL)
1190 	    goto theend;
1191 	/* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding
1192 	 * with markers. */
1193 	mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L);
1194 	did_append = TRUE;
1195     }
1196 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1197     else
1198     {
1199 	/*
1200 	 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line.
1201 	 */
1202 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum++;
1203 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed)
1204 	{
1205 	    /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL
1206 	     * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice.
1207 	     */
1208 	    (void)u_save_cursor();		    /* errors are ignored! */
1209 	    vr_lines_changed++;
1210 	}
1211 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE);
1212 	changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
1213 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
1214 	did_append = FALSE;
1215     }
1216 #endif
1217 
1218     if (newindent
1219 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1220 		    || did_si
1221 #endif
1222 				)
1223     {
1224 	++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1225 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1226 	if (did_si)
1227 	{
1228 	    if (p_sr)
1229 		newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1230 	    newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1231 	}
1232 #endif
1233 	/* Copy the indent only if expand tab is disabled */
1234 	if (curbuf->b_p_ci && !curbuf->b_p_et)
1235 	{
1236 	    (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line);
1237 
1238 	    /*
1239 	     * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing
1240 	     * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve
1241 	     * it.  It gets restored at the function end.
1242 	     */
1243 	    curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE;
1244 	}
1245 	else
1246 	    (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT);
1247 	less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col;
1248 
1249 	ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1250 
1251 	/*
1252 	 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must
1253 	 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS
1254 	 */
1255 	if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1256 	    for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n)
1257 		replace_push(NUL);
1258 	newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col;
1259 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1260 	if (no_si)
1261 	    did_si = FALSE;
1262 #endif
1263     }
1264 
1265 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1266     /*
1267      * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be
1268      * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS.
1269      */
1270     if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1271 	while (lead_len-- > 0)
1272 	    replace_push(NUL);
1273 #endif
1274 
1275     curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1276 
1277     if (dir == FORWARD)
1278     {
1279 	if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT))
1280 	{
1281 	    /* truncate current line at cursor */
1282 	    saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
1283 	    /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */
1284 	    if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL))
1285 		truncate_spaces(saved_line);
1286 	    ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE);
1287 	    saved_line = NULL;
1288 	    if (did_append)
1289 	    {
1290 		changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col,
1291 					       curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L);
1292 		did_append = FALSE;
1293 
1294 		/* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */
1295 		if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX)
1296 		    mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
1297 					 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off,
1298 							1L, (long)-less_cols);
1299 	    }
1300 	    else
1301 		changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
1302 	}
1303 
1304 	/*
1305 	 * Put the cursor on the new line.  Careful: the scrollup() above may
1306 	 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor.
1307 	 */
1308 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1;
1309     }
1310     if (did_append)
1311 	changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L);
1312 
1313     curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol;
1314 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1315     curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1316 #endif
1317 
1318 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1319     /*
1320      * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop
1321      * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in
1322      * normal INSERT mode.
1323      */
1324     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1325     {
1326 	vreplace_mode = State;	/* So we know to put things right later */
1327 	State = INSERT;
1328     }
1329     else
1330 	vreplace_mode = 0;
1331 #endif
1332 #ifdef FEAT_LISP
1333     /*
1334      * May do lisp indenting.
1335      */
1336     if (!p_paste
1337 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1338 	    && leader == NULL
1339 # endif
1340 	    && curbuf->b_p_lisp
1341 	    && curbuf->b_p_ai)
1342     {
1343 	fixthisline(get_lisp_indent);
1344 	p = ml_get_curline();
1345 	ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1346     }
1347 #endif
1348 #ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
1349     /*
1350      * May do indenting after opening a new line.
1351      */
1352     if (!p_paste
1353 	    && (curbuf->b_p_cin
1354 #  ifdef FEAT_EVAL
1355 		    || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL
1356 #  endif
1357 		)
1358 	    && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD
1359 		? KEY_OPEN_FORW
1360 		: KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)))
1361     {
1362 	do_c_expr_indent();
1363 	p = ml_get_curline();
1364 	ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1365     }
1366 #endif
1367 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1368     if (vreplace_mode != 0)
1369 	State = vreplace_mode;
1370 #endif
1371 
1372 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1373     /*
1374      * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the
1375      * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff
1376      * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()).
1377      */
1378     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1379     {
1380 	/* Put new line in p_extra */
1381 	p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
1382 	if (p_extra == NULL)
1383 	    goto theend;
1384 
1385 	/* Put back original line */
1386 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE);
1387 
1388 	/* Insert new stuff into line again */
1389 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
1390 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1391 	curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1392 #endif
1393 	ins_bytes(p_extra);	/* will call changed_bytes() */
1394 	vim_free(p_extra);
1395 	next_line = NULL;
1396     }
1397 #endif
1398 
1399     retval = TRUE;		/* success! */
1400 theend:
1401     curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi;
1402     vim_free(saved_line);
1403     vim_free(next_line);
1404     vim_free(allocated);
1405     return retval;
1406 }
1407 
1408 #if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO)
1409 /*
1410  * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string
1411  * which introduces a comment.	If this string is not a comment then 0 is
1412  * returned.
1413  * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized
1414  * comment leader.
1415  * "backward" must be true for the "O" command.
1416  */
1417     int
1418 get_leader_len(line, flags, backward)
1419     char_u	*line;
1420     char_u	**flags;
1421     int		backward;
1422 {
1423     int		i, j;
1424     int		got_com = FALSE;
1425     int		found_one;
1426     char_u	part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* buffer for one option part */
1427     char_u	*string;		/* pointer to comment string */
1428     char_u	*list;
1429 
1430     i = 0;
1431     while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))    /* leading white space is ignored */
1432 	++i;
1433 
1434     /*
1435      * Repeat to match several nested comment strings.
1436      */
1437     while (line[i])
1438     {
1439 	/*
1440 	 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match
1441 	 */
1442 	found_one = FALSE;
1443 	for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; )
1444 	{
1445 	    /*
1446 	     * Get one option part into part_buf[].  Advance list to next one.
1447 	     * put string at start of string.
1448 	     */
1449 	    if (!got_com && flags != NULL)  /* remember where flags started */
1450 		*flags = list;
1451 	    (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
1452 	    string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':');
1453 	    if (string == NULL)	    /* missing ':', ignore this part */
1454 		continue;
1455 	    *string++ = NUL;	    /* isolate flags from string */
1456 
1457 	    /*
1458 	     * When already found a nested comment, only accept further
1459 	     * nested comments.
1460 	     */
1461 	    if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1462 		continue;
1463 
1464 	    /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */
1465 	    if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL)
1466 		continue;
1467 
1468 	    /*
1469 	     * Line contents and string must match.
1470 	     * When string starts with white space, must have some white space
1471 	     * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of
1472 	     * TABs and spaces).
1473 	     */
1474 	    if (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1475 	    {
1476 		if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1]))
1477 		    continue;
1478 		while (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1479 		    ++string;
1480 	    }
1481 	    for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j)
1482 		;
1483 	    if (string[j] != NUL)
1484 		continue;
1485 
1486 	    /*
1487 	     * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an
1488 	     * end-of-line after the string in the line.
1489 	     */
1490 	    if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL
1491 			   && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL)
1492 		continue;
1493 
1494 	    /*
1495 	     * We have found a match, stop searching.
1496 	     */
1497 	    i += j;
1498 	    got_com = TRUE;
1499 	    found_one = TRUE;
1500 	    break;
1501 	}
1502 
1503 	/*
1504 	 * No match found, stop scanning.
1505 	 */
1506 	if (!found_one)
1507 	    break;
1508 
1509 	/*
1510 	 * Include any trailing white space.
1511 	 */
1512 	while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))
1513 	    ++i;
1514 
1515 	/*
1516 	 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here.
1517 	 */
1518 	if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1519 	    break;
1520     }
1521     return (got_com ? i : 0);
1522 }
1523 #endif
1524 
1525 /*
1526  * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum".
1527  */
1528     int
1529 plines(lnum)
1530     linenr_T	lnum;
1531 {
1532     return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1533 }
1534 
1535     int
1536 plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight)
1537     win_T	*wp;
1538     linenr_T	lnum;
1539     int		winheight;	/* when TRUE limit to window height */
1540 {
1541 #if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO)
1542     /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line.  When folded the result
1543      * is one line anyway. */
1544     return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1545 }
1546 
1547     int
1548 plines_nofill(lnum)
1549     linenr_T	lnum;
1550 {
1551     return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1552 }
1553 
1554     int
1555 plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight)
1556     win_T	*wp;
1557     linenr_T	lnum;
1558     int		winheight;	/* when TRUE limit to window height */
1559 {
1560 #endif
1561     int		lines;
1562 
1563     if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1564 	return 1;
1565 
1566 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1567     if (wp->w_width == 0)
1568 	return 1;
1569 #endif
1570 
1571 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1572     /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */
1573     /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */
1574     if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE)
1575 	return 1;
1576 #endif
1577 
1578     lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum);
1579     if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height)
1580 	return (int)wp->w_height;
1581     return lines;
1582 }
1583 
1584 /*
1585  * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window
1586  * "wp".  Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'.
1587  */
1588     int
1589 plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum)
1590     win_T	*wp;
1591     linenr_T	lnum;
1592 {
1593     char_u	*s;
1594     long	col;
1595     int		width;
1596 
1597     s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1598     if (*s == NUL)		/* empty line */
1599 	return 1;
1600     col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL);
1601 
1602     /*
1603      * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one
1604      * extra column.
1605      */
1606     if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL)
1607 	col += 1;
1608 
1609     /*
1610      * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'.
1611      */
1612     width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1613     if (width <= 0)
1614 	return 32000;
1615     if (col <= width)
1616 	return 1;
1617     col -= width;
1618     width += win_col_off2(wp);
1619     return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1;
1620 }
1621 
1622 /*
1623  * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines
1624  * used from the start of the line to the given column number.
1625  */
1626     int
1627 plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column)
1628     win_T	*wp;
1629     linenr_T	lnum;
1630     long	column;
1631 {
1632     long	col;
1633     char_u	*s;
1634     int		lines = 0;
1635     int		width;
1636 
1637 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1638     /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line.  When folded the result
1639      * is one line anyway. */
1640     lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1641 #endif
1642 
1643     if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1644 	return lines + 1;
1645 
1646 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1647     if (wp->w_width == 0)
1648 	return lines + 1;
1649 #endif
1650 
1651     s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1652 
1653     col = 0;
1654     while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0)
1655     {
1656 	col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL);
1657 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1658 	if (has_mbyte)
1659 	    s += (*mb_ptr2len_check)(s);
1660 	else
1661 #endif
1662 	    ++s;
1663     }
1664 
1665     /*
1666      * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in
1667      * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last
1668      * screen position of the TAB.  This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps
1669      * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of
1670      * 'ts') -- webb.
1671      */
1672     if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1))
1673 	col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1;
1674 
1675     /*
1676      * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc.
1677      */
1678     width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1679     if (width > 0)
1680     {
1681 	lines += 1;
1682 	if (col >= width)
1683 	    lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp));
1684 	if (lines <= wp->w_height)
1685 	    return lines;
1686     }
1687     return (int)(wp->w_height);	    /* maximum length */
1688 }
1689 
1690     int
1691 plines_m_win(wp, first, last)
1692     win_T	*wp;
1693     linenr_T	first, last;
1694 {
1695     int		count = 0;
1696 
1697     while (first <= last)
1698     {
1699 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1700 	int	x;
1701 
1702 	/* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines
1703 	 * that are maybe folded. */
1704 	x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL);
1705 	if (x > 0)
1706 	{
1707 	    ++count;	    /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */
1708 	    first += x;
1709 	}
1710 	else
1711 #endif
1712 	{
1713 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1714 	    if (first == wp->w_topline)
1715 		count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill;
1716 	    else
1717 #endif
1718 		count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE);
1719 	    ++first;
1720 	}
1721     }
1722     return (count);
1723 }
1724 
1725 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO)
1726 /*
1727  * Insert string "p" at the cursor position.  Stops at a NUL byte.
1728  * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1729  */
1730     void
1731 ins_bytes(p)
1732     char_u	*p;
1733 {
1734     ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p));
1735 }
1736 #endif
1737 
1738 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \
1739 	|| defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1740 /*
1741  * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position.
1742  * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1743  */
1744     void
1745 ins_bytes_len(p, len)
1746     char_u	*p;
1747     int		len;
1748 {
1749     int		i;
1750 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1751     int		n;
1752 
1753     for (i = 0; i < len; i += n)
1754     {
1755 	n = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p + i);
1756 	ins_char_bytes(p + i, n);
1757     }
1758 # else
1759     for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
1760 	ins_char(p[i]);
1761 # endif
1762 }
1763 #endif
1764 
1765 /*
1766  * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position.
1767  * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character.
1768  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
1769  * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must
1770  * convert bytes to a character.
1771  */
1772     void
1773 ins_char(c)
1774     int		c;
1775 {
1776 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1777     char_u	buf[MB_MAXBYTES];
1778     int		n;
1779 
1780     n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf);
1781 
1782     /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte.
1783      * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */
1784     if (buf[0] == 0)
1785 	buf[0] = '\n';
1786 
1787     ins_char_bytes(buf, n);
1788 }
1789 
1790     void
1791 ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen)
1792     char_u	*buf;
1793     int		charlen;
1794 {
1795     int		c = buf[0];
1796     int		l, j;
1797 #endif
1798     int		newlen;		/* nr of bytes inserted */
1799     int		oldlen;		/* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */
1800     char_u	*p;
1801     char_u	*newp;
1802     char_u	*oldp;
1803     int		linelen;	/* length of old line including NUL */
1804     colnr_T	col;
1805     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1806     int		i;
1807 
1808 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1809     /* Break tabs if needed. */
1810     if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
1811 	coladvance_force(getviscol());
1812 #endif
1813 
1814     col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1815     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
1816     linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1;
1817 
1818     /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */
1819     oldlen = 0;
1820 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1821     newlen = charlen;
1822 #else
1823     newlen = 1;
1824 #endif
1825 
1826     if (State & REPLACE_FLAG)
1827     {
1828 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1829 	if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1830 	{
1831 	    colnr_T	new_vcol = 0;   /* init for GCC */
1832 	    colnr_T	vcol;
1833 	    int		old_list;
1834 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1835 	    char_u	buf[2];
1836 #endif
1837 
1838 	    /*
1839 	     * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag.
1840 	     * Returns the old value of list, so when finished,
1841 	     * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this.
1842 	     */
1843 	    old_list = curwin->w_p_list;
1844 	    if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL)
1845 		curwin->w_p_list = FALSE;
1846 
1847 	    /*
1848 	     * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more
1849 	     * characters (zero if it's a TAB).  Count the number of bytes to
1850 	     * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen
1851 	     * cells.  May result in adding spaces to fill a gap.
1852 	     */
1853 	    getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL);
1854 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1855 	    buf[0] = c;
1856 	    buf[1] = NUL;
1857 #endif
1858 	    new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol);
1859 	    while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol)
1860 	    {
1861 		vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol);
1862 		/* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right
1863 		 * position. */
1864 		if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB)
1865 		    break;
1866 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1867 		oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col + oldlen);
1868 #else
1869 		++oldlen;
1870 #endif
1871 		/* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */
1872 		if (vcol > new_vcol)
1873 		    newlen += vcol - new_vcol;
1874 	    }
1875 	    curwin->w_p_list = old_list;
1876 	}
1877 	else
1878 #endif
1879 	    if (oldp[col] != NUL)
1880 	{
1881 	    /* normal replace */
1882 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1883 	    oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col);
1884 #else
1885 	    oldlen = 1;
1886 #endif
1887 	}
1888 
1889 
1890 	/* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be
1891 	 * put back when BS is used.  The bytes of a multi-byte character are
1892 	 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off
1893 	 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */
1894 	replace_push(NUL);
1895 	for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i)
1896 	{
1897 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1898 	    l = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col + i) - 1;
1899 	    for (j = l; j >= 0; --j)
1900 		replace_push(oldp[col + i + j]);
1901 	    i += l;
1902 #else
1903 	    replace_push(oldp[col + i]);
1904 #endif
1905 	}
1906     }
1907 
1908     newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen));
1909     if (newp == NULL)
1910 	return;
1911 
1912     /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */
1913     if (col > 0)
1914 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
1915 
1916     /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */
1917     p = newp + col;
1918     mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen,
1919 					    (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen));
1920 
1921     /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */
1922 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1923     mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen);
1924     i = charlen;
1925 #else
1926     *p = c;
1927     i = 1;
1928 #endif
1929 
1930     /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */
1931     while (i < newlen)
1932 	p[i++] = ' ';
1933 
1934     /* Replace the line in the buffer. */
1935     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
1936 
1937     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
1938     changed_bytes(lnum, col);
1939 
1940     /*
1941      * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly
1942      * show the match for right parens and braces.
1943      */
1944     if (p_sm && (State & INSERT)
1945 	    && msg_silent == 0
1946 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1947 	    && charlen == 1
1948 #endif
1949        )
1950 	showmatch(c);
1951 
1952 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
1953     if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG))
1954 #endif
1955     {
1956 	/* Normal insert: move cursor right */
1957 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1958 	curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen;
1959 #else
1960 	++curwin->w_cursor.col;
1961 #endif
1962     }
1963     /*
1964      * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later.
1965      */
1966 }
1967 
1968 /*
1969  * Insert a string at the cursor position.
1970  * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode.
1971  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
1972  */
1973     void
1974 ins_str(s)
1975     char_u	*s;
1976 {
1977     char_u	*oldp, *newp;
1978     int		newlen = (int)STRLEN(s);
1979     int		oldlen;
1980     colnr_T	col;
1981     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1982 
1983 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1984     if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
1985 	coladvance_force(getviscol());
1986 #endif
1987 
1988     col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1989     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
1990     oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
1991 
1992     newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1));
1993     if (newp == NULL)
1994 	return;
1995     if (col > 0)
1996 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
1997     mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen);
1998     mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1));
1999     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2000     changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2001     curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen;
2002 }
2003 
2004 /*
2005  * Delete one character under the cursor.
2006  * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2007  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2008  *
2009  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2010  */
2011     int
2012 del_char(fixpos)
2013     int		fixpos;
2014 {
2015 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2016     if (has_mbyte)
2017     {
2018 	/* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */
2019 	mb_adjust_cursor();
2020 	if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL)
2021 	    return FAIL;
2022 	return del_chars(1L, fixpos);
2023     }
2024 #endif
2025     return del_bytes(1L, fixpos);
2026 }
2027 
2028 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
2029 /*
2030  * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes.
2031  */
2032     int
2033 del_chars(count, fixpos)
2034     long	count;
2035     int		fixpos;
2036 {
2037     long	bytes = 0;
2038     long	i;
2039     char_u	*p;
2040     int		l;
2041 
2042     p = ml_get_cursor();
2043     for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i)
2044     {
2045 	l = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p);
2046 	bytes += l;
2047 	p += l;
2048     }
2049     return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos);
2050 }
2051 #endif
2052 
2053 /*
2054  * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor.
2055  * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2056  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2057  *
2058  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2059  */
2060     int
2061 del_bytes(count, fixpos)
2062     long	count;
2063     int		fixpos;
2064 {
2065     char_u	*oldp, *newp;
2066     colnr_T	oldlen;
2067     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2068     colnr_T	col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2069     int		was_alloced;
2070     long	movelen;
2071 
2072     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2073     oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2074 
2075     /*
2076      * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line.
2077      */
2078     if (col >= oldlen)
2079 	return FAIL;
2080 
2081 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2082     /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only
2083      * delete the last combining character. */
2084     if (p_deco && enc_utf8 && (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col) <= count)
2085     {
2086 	int	c1, c2;
2087 	int	n;
2088 
2089 	(void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, &c1, &c2);
2090 	if (c1 != NUL)
2091 	{
2092 	    /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */
2093 	    n = col;
2094 	    do
2095 	    {
2096 		col = n;
2097 		count = utf_ptr2len_check(oldp + n);
2098 		n += count;
2099 	    } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n));
2100 	    fixpos = 0;
2101 	}
2102     }
2103 #endif
2104 
2105     /*
2106      * When count is too big, reduce it.
2107      */
2108     movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */
2109     if (movelen <= 1)
2110     {
2111 	/*
2112 	 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and
2113 	 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2114 	 */
2115 	if (col > 0 && fixpos)
2116 	{
2117 	    --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2118 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2119 	    curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
2120 #endif
2121 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2122 	    if (has_mbyte)
2123 		curwin->w_cursor.col -=
2124 			    (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col);
2125 #endif
2126 	}
2127 	count = oldlen - col;
2128 	movelen = 1;
2129     }
2130 
2131     /*
2132      * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the
2133      * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated
2134      */
2135     was_alloced = ml_line_alloced();	    /* check if oldp was allocated */
2136 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2137     if (was_alloced && usingNetbeans)
2138 	netbeans_removed(curbuf, lnum, col, count);
2139     /* else is handled by ml_replace() */
2140 #endif
2141     if (was_alloced)
2142 	newp = oldp;			    /* use same allocated memory */
2143     else
2144     {					    /* need to allocate a new line */
2145 	newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count));
2146 	if (newp == NULL)
2147 	    return FAIL;
2148 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2149     }
2150     mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen);
2151     if (!was_alloced)
2152 	ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2153 
2154     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2155     changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2156 
2157     return OK;
2158 }
2159 
2160 /*
2161  * Delete from cursor to end of line.
2162  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2163  *
2164  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2165  */
2166     int
2167 truncate_line(fixpos)
2168     int		fixpos;	    /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */
2169 {
2170     char_u	*newp;
2171     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2172     colnr_T	col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2173 
2174     if (col == 0)
2175 	newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
2176     else
2177 	newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col);
2178 
2179     if (newp == NULL)
2180 	return FAIL;
2181 
2182     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2183 
2184     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2185     changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2186 
2187     /*
2188      * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2189      */
2190     if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0)
2191 	--curwin->w_cursor.col;
2192 
2193     return OK;
2194 }
2195 
2196 /*
2197  * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor.
2198  * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE.
2199  */
2200     void
2201 del_lines(nlines, undo)
2202     long	nlines;		/* number of lines to delete */
2203     int		undo;		/* if TRUE, prepare for undo */
2204 {
2205     long	n;
2206 
2207     if (nlines <= 0)
2208 	return;
2209 
2210     /* save the deleted lines for undo */
2211     if (undo && u_savedel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, nlines) == FAIL)
2212 	return;
2213 
2214     for (n = 0; n < nlines; )
2215     {
2216 	if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY)	    /* nothing to delete */
2217 	    break;
2218 
2219 	ml_delete(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE);
2220 	++n;
2221 
2222 	/* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */
2223 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
2224 	    break;
2225     }
2226     /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2227     deleted_lines_mark(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, n);
2228 
2229     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
2230     check_cursor_lnum();
2231 }
2232 
2233     int
2234 gchar_pos(pos)
2235     pos_T *pos;
2236 {
2237     char_u	*ptr = ml_get_pos(pos);
2238 
2239 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2240     if (has_mbyte)
2241 	return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr);
2242 #endif
2243     return (int)*ptr;
2244 }
2245 
2246     int
2247 gchar_cursor()
2248 {
2249 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2250     if (has_mbyte)
2251 	return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor());
2252 #endif
2253     return (int)*ml_get_cursor();
2254 }
2255 
2256 /*
2257  * Write a character at the current cursor position.
2258  * It is directly written into the block.
2259  */
2260     void
2261 pchar_cursor(c)
2262     int c;
2263 {
2264     *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE)
2265 						  + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c;
2266 }
2267 
2268 #if 0 /* not used */
2269 /*
2270  * Put *pos at end of current buffer
2271  */
2272     void
2273 goto_endofbuf(pos)
2274     pos_T    *pos;
2275 {
2276     char_u  *p;
2277 
2278     pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count;
2279     pos->col = 0;
2280     p = ml_get(pos->lnum);
2281     while (*p++)
2282 	++pos->col;
2283 }
2284 #endif
2285 
2286 /*
2287  * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first
2288  *		    non-blank in the line.
2289  * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in
2290  *		    the line.
2291  */
2292     int
2293 inindent(extra)
2294     int	    extra;
2295 {
2296     char_u	*ptr;
2297     colnr_T	col;
2298 
2299     for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col)
2300 	++ptr;
2301     if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra)
2302 	return TRUE;
2303     else
2304 	return FALSE;
2305 }
2306 
2307 /*
2308  * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma.
2309  */
2310     char_u *
2311 skip_to_option_part(p)
2312     char_u  *p;
2313 {
2314     if (*p == ',')
2315 	++p;
2316     while (*p == ' ')
2317 	++p;
2318     return p;
2319 }
2320 
2321 /*
2322  * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed.
2323  *
2324  * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also
2325  * mark the area of the display to be redrawn.
2326  */
2327     void
2328 changed()
2329 {
2330 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK)
2331     /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't
2332      * mean a change of the buffer yet.  That is delayed until the
2333      * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */
2334     if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting)
2335 	return;
2336     xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE;
2337 #endif
2338 
2339     if (!curbuf->b_changed)
2340     {
2341 	int	save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll;
2342 
2343 	change_warning(0);
2344 	/* Create a swap file if that is wanted.
2345 	 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */
2346 	if (curbuf->b_may_swap
2347 #ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX
2348 		&& !bt_dontwrite(curbuf)
2349 #endif
2350 		)
2351 	{
2352 	    ml_open_file(curbuf);
2353 
2354 	    /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message.
2355 	     * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected
2356 	     * message.  Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now,
2357 	     * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */
2358 	    if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0)
2359 	    {
2360 		out_flush();
2361 		ui_delay(2000L, TRUE);
2362 		wait_return(TRUE);
2363 		msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll;
2364 	    }
2365 	}
2366 	curbuf->b_changed = TRUE;
2367 	ml_setdirty(curbuf, TRUE);
2368 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2369 	check_status(curbuf);
2370 #endif
2371 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2372 	need_maketitle = TRUE;	    /* set window title later */
2373 #endif
2374     }
2375     ++curbuf->b_changedtick;
2376     ++global_changedtick;
2377 }
2378 
2379 static void changedOneline __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
2380 static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2381 
2382 /*
2383  * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer.
2384  * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2385  * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed()
2386  * - invalidates cached values
2387  */
2388     void
2389 changed_bytes(lnum, col)
2390     linenr_T	lnum;
2391     colnr_T	col;
2392 {
2393     changedOneline(lnum);
2394     changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L);
2395 }
2396 
2397     static void
2398 changedOneline(lnum)
2399     linenr_T	lnum;
2400 {
2401     if (curbuf->b_mod_set)
2402     {
2403 	/* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
2404 	if (lnum < curbuf->b_mod_top)
2405 	    curbuf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2406 	else if (lnum >= curbuf->b_mod_bot)
2407 	    curbuf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2408     }
2409     else
2410     {
2411 	/* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */
2412 	curbuf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2413 	curbuf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2414 	curbuf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2415 	curbuf->b_mod_xlines = 0;
2416     }
2417 }
2418 
2419 /*
2420  * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2421  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2422  * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2423  */
2424     void
2425 appended_lines(lnum, count)
2426     linenr_T	lnum;
2427     long	count;
2428 {
2429     changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2430 }
2431 
2432 /*
2433  * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2434  */
2435     void
2436 appended_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2437     linenr_T	lnum;
2438     long	count;
2439 {
2440     mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L);
2441     changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2442 }
2443 
2444 /*
2445  * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2446  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2447  * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2448  */
2449     void
2450 deleted_lines(lnum, count)
2451     linenr_T	lnum;
2452     long	count;
2453 {
2454     changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2455 }
2456 
2457 /*
2458  * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2459  */
2460     void
2461 deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2462     linenr_T	lnum;
2463     long	count;
2464 {
2465     mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count);
2466     changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2467 }
2468 
2469 /*
2470  * Changed lines for the current buffer.
2471  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2472  * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed()
2473  * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2474  * - invalidate cached values
2475  * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line
2476  * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change).
2477  * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal.
2478  * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*.
2479  */
2480     void
2481 changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2482     linenr_T	lnum;	    /* first line with change */
2483     colnr_T	col;	    /* column in first line with change */
2484     linenr_T	lnume;	    /* line below last changed line */
2485     long	xtra;	    /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2486 {
2487     if (curbuf->b_mod_set)
2488     {
2489 	/* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
2490 	if (lnum < curbuf->b_mod_top)
2491 	    curbuf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2492 	if (lnum < curbuf->b_mod_bot)
2493 	{
2494 	    /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */
2495 	    curbuf->b_mod_bot += xtra;
2496 	    if (curbuf->b_mod_bot < lnum)
2497 		curbuf->b_mod_bot = lnum;
2498 	}
2499 	if (lnume + xtra > curbuf->b_mod_bot)
2500 	    curbuf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2501 	curbuf->b_mod_xlines += xtra;
2502     }
2503     else
2504     {
2505 	/* set the area that must be redisplayed */
2506 	curbuf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2507 	curbuf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2508 	curbuf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2509 	curbuf->b_mod_xlines = xtra;
2510     }
2511 
2512     changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra);
2513 }
2514 
2515     static void
2516 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2517     linenr_T	lnum;
2518     colnr_T	col;
2519     linenr_T	lnume;
2520     long	xtra;
2521 {
2522     win_T	*wp;
2523     int		i;
2524 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2525     int		cols;
2526     pos_T	*p;
2527     int		add;
2528 #endif
2529 
2530     /* mark the buffer as modified */
2531     changed();
2532 
2533     /* set the '. mark */
2534     if (!cmdmod.keepjumps)
2535     {
2536 	curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum;
2537 	curbuf->b_last_change.col = col;
2538 
2539 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2540 	/* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we
2541 	 * don't have an entry yet. */
2542 	if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2543 	{
2544 	    if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2545 		add = TRUE;
2546 	    else
2547 	    {
2548 		/* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same
2549 		 * as the last one and the column is not too far away.  Avoids
2550 		 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */
2551 		p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1];
2552 		if (p->lnum != lnum)
2553 		    add = TRUE;
2554 		else
2555 		{
2556 		    cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE);
2557 		    if (cols == 0)
2558 			cols = 79;
2559 		    add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col);
2560 		}
2561 	    }
2562 	    if (add)
2563 	    {
2564 		/* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes
2565 		 * and it's at some distance of the last change.  Use a new
2566 		 * position in the changelist. */
2567 		curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE;
2568 
2569 		if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE)
2570 		{
2571 		    /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */
2572 		    curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1;
2573 		    mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1,
2574 					  sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1));
2575 		    FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2576 		    {
2577 			/* Correct position in changelist for other windows on
2578 			 * this buffer. */
2579 			if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0)
2580 			    --wp->w_changelistidx;
2581 		    }
2582 		}
2583 		FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2584 		{
2585 		    /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is
2586 		     * at the end it stays at the end. */
2587 		    if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf
2588 			    && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen)
2589 			++wp->w_changelistidx;
2590 		}
2591 		++curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2592 	    }
2593 	}
2594 	curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] =
2595 							curbuf->b_last_change;
2596 	/* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g,"
2597 	 * takes you back to it. */
2598 	curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2599 #endif
2600     }
2601 
2602     FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2603     {
2604 	if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf)
2605 	{
2606 	    /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */
2607 	    if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID)
2608 		wp->w_redr_type = VALID;
2609 
2610 	    /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached
2611 	     * values for the cursor. */
2612 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2613 	    /*
2614 	     * Update the folds for this window.  Can't postpone this, because
2615 	     * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd".
2616 	     */
2617 	    foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1);
2618 
2619 	    /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become
2620 	     * included in a fold.  Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that
2621 	     * might be displayed differently.
2622 	     * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when
2623 	     * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */
2624 	    i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL);
2625 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum)
2626 		wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2627 	    i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL);
2628 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume)
2629 		wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2630 
2631 	    /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines,
2632 	     * compare with the first line in that range. */
2633 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum)
2634 	    {
2635 		i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum);
2636 		if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum)
2637 		    changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2638 	    }
2639 #endif
2640 
2641 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum)
2642 		changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2643 	    else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col)
2644 		changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp);
2645 	    if (wp->w_botline >= lnum)
2646 	    {
2647 		/* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make
2648 		 * other lines scroll down below botline). */
2649 		approximate_botline_win(wp);
2650 	    }
2651 
2652 	    /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid.
2653 	     * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for
2654 	     * inserted/deleted lines.  Makes it possible to stop displaying
2655 	     * after the change. */
2656 	    for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i)
2657 		if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid)
2658 		{
2659 		    if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum)
2660 		    {
2661 			if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume)
2662 			{
2663 			    /* line included in change */
2664 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2665 			}
2666 			else if (xtra != 0)
2667 			{
2668 			    /* line below change */
2669 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra;
2670 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2671 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra;
2672 #endif
2673 			}
2674 		    }
2675 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2676 		    else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum)
2677 		    {
2678 			/* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines,
2679 			 * may need to be redrawn */
2680 			wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2681 		    }
2682 #endif
2683 		}
2684 	}
2685     }
2686 
2687     /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn,
2688      * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */
2689     if (must_redraw < VALID)
2690 	must_redraw = VALID;
2691 }
2692 
2693 /*
2694  * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf'
2695  */
2696     void
2697 unchanged(buf, ff)
2698     buf_T	*buf;
2699     int		ff;	/* also reset 'fileformat' */
2700 {
2701     if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf)))
2702     {
2703 	buf->b_changed = 0;
2704 	ml_setdirty(buf, FALSE);
2705 	if (ff)
2706 	    save_file_ff(buf);
2707 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2708 	check_status(buf);
2709 #endif
2710 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2711 	need_maketitle = TRUE;	    /* set window title later */
2712 #endif
2713     }
2714     ++buf->b_changedtick;
2715     ++global_changedtick;
2716 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2717     netbeans_unmodified(buf);
2718 #endif
2719 }
2720 
2721 #if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO)
2722 /*
2723  * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf'
2724  *		 need to be updated
2725  */
2726     void
2727 check_status(buf)
2728     buf_T	*buf;
2729 {
2730     win_T	*wp;
2731 
2732     for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2733 	if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height)
2734 	{
2735 	    wp->w_redr_status = TRUE;
2736 	    if (must_redraw < VALID)
2737 		must_redraw = VALID;
2738 	}
2739 }
2740 #endif
2741 
2742 /*
2743  * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change.
2744  * Don't do this for autocommands.
2745  * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer.
2746  * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but b_did_warn
2747  * will be TRUE.
2748  */
2749     void
2750 change_warning(col)
2751     int	    col;		/* column for message; non-zero when in insert
2752 				   mode and 'showmode' is on */
2753 {
2754     if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE
2755 	    && curbufIsChanged() == 0
2756 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2757 	    && !autocmd_busy
2758 #endif
2759 	    && curbuf->b_p_ro)
2760     {
2761 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2762 	apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf);
2763 	if (!curbuf->b_p_ro)
2764 	    return;
2765 #endif
2766 	/*
2767 	 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should
2768 	 * be after the mode message.
2769 	 */
2770 	msg_start();
2771 	if (msg_row == Rows - 1)
2772 	    msg_col = col;
2773 	msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
2774 	MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file"),
2775 						   hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST);
2776 	msg_clr_eos();
2777 	(void)msg_end();
2778 	if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode)
2779 	{
2780 	    out_flush();
2781 	    ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */
2782 	}
2783 	curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE;
2784 	redraw_cmdline = FALSE;	/* don't redraw and erase the message */
2785 	if (msg_row < Rows - 1)
2786 	    showmode();
2787     }
2788 }
2789 
2790 /*
2791  * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'.
2792  * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid
2793  * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit.
2794  * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters
2795  * from any buffers but directly from the user.
2796  *
2797  * return the 'y' or 'n'
2798  */
2799     int
2800 ask_yesno(str, direct)
2801     char_u  *str;
2802     int	    direct;
2803 {
2804     int	    r = ' ';
2805     int	    save_State = State;
2806 
2807     if (exiting)		/* put terminal in raw mode for this question */
2808 	settmode(TMODE_RAW);
2809     ++no_wait_return;
2810 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
2811     dont_scroll = TRUE;		/* disallow scrolling here */
2812 #endif
2813     State = CONFIRM;		/* mouse behaves like with :confirm */
2814 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2815     setmouse();			/* disables mouse for xterm */
2816 #endif
2817     ++no_mapping;
2818     ++allow_keys;		/* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
2819 
2820     while (r != 'y' && r != 'n')
2821     {
2822 	/* same highlighting as for wait_return */
2823 	smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str);
2824 	if (direct)
2825 	    r = get_keystroke();
2826 	else
2827 	    r = safe_vgetc();
2828 	if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC)
2829 	    r = 'n';
2830 	msg_putchar(r);	    /* show what you typed */
2831 	out_flush();
2832     }
2833     --no_wait_return;
2834     State = save_State;
2835 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2836     setmouse();
2837 #endif
2838     --no_mapping;
2839     --allow_keys;
2840 
2841     return r;
2842 }
2843 
2844 /*
2845  * Get a key stroke directly from the user.
2846  * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left
2847  * button (used at the more prompt).
2848  * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters.
2849  * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored.
2850  * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC.
2851  */
2852     int
2853 get_keystroke()
2854 {
2855 #define CBUFLEN 151
2856     char_u	buf[CBUFLEN];
2857     int		len = 0;
2858     int		n;
2859     int		save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c;
2860 
2861     mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE;	/* mappings are not used here */
2862     for (;;)
2863     {
2864 	cursor_on();
2865 	out_flush();
2866 
2867 	/* First time: blocking wait.  Second time: wait up to 100ms for a
2868 	 * terminal code to complete.  Leave some room for check_termcode() to
2869 	 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL).  And
2870 	 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */
2871 	n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3,
2872 						    len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0);
2873 	if (n > 0)
2874 	{
2875 	    /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */
2876 	    n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE);
2877 	    len += n;
2878 	}
2879 
2880 	/* incomplete termcode: get more characters */
2881 	if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0)
2882 	    continue;
2883 	/* found a termcode: adjust length */
2884 	if (n > 0)
2885 	    len = n;
2886 	if (len == 0)	    /* nothing typed yet */
2887 	    continue;
2888 
2889 	/* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */
2890 	n = buf[0];
2891 	if (n == K_SPECIAL)
2892 	{
2893 	    n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]);
2894 	    if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER
2895 		    || n == K_IGNORE
2896 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2897 		    || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM
2898 		    || n == K_LEFTDRAG
2899 		    || n == K_LEFTRELEASE
2900 		    || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM
2901 		    || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE
2902 		    || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG
2903 		    || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE
2904 		    || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE
2905 		    || n == K_RIGHTDRAG
2906 		    || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE
2907 		    || n == K_MOUSEDOWN
2908 		    || n == K_MOUSEUP
2909 		    || n == K_X1MOUSE
2910 		    || n == K_X1DRAG
2911 		    || n == K_X1RELEASE
2912 		    || n == K_X2MOUSE
2913 		    || n == K_X2DRAG
2914 		    || n == K_X2RELEASE
2915 # ifdef FEAT_GUI
2916 		    || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR
2917 		    || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR
2918 # endif
2919 #endif
2920 	       )
2921 	    {
2922 		if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER)
2923 		    mod_mask = buf[2];
2924 		len -= 3;
2925 		if (len > 0)
2926 		    mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len);
2927 		continue;
2928 	    }
2929 	}
2930 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2931 	if (has_mbyte)
2932 	{
2933 	    if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len)
2934 		continue;	/* more bytes to get */
2935 	    buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL;
2936 	    n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf);
2937 	}
2938 #endif
2939 #ifdef UNIX
2940 	if (n == intr_char)
2941 	    n = ESC;
2942 #endif
2943 	break;
2944     }
2945 
2946     mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c;
2947     return n;
2948 }
2949 
2950 /*
2951  * get a number from the user
2952  */
2953     int
2954 get_number(colon)
2955     int	colon;			/* allow colon to abort */
2956 {
2957     int	n = 0;
2958     int	c;
2959 
2960     /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a
2961      * zero (as if CR was hit). */
2962     if (msg_silent != 0)
2963 	return 0;
2964 
2965 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
2966     dont_scroll = TRUE;		/* disallow scrolling here */
2967 #endif
2968     ++no_mapping;
2969     ++allow_keys;		/* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
2970     for (;;)
2971     {
2972 	windgoto(msg_row, msg_col);
2973 	c = safe_vgetc();
2974 	if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c))
2975 	{
2976 	    n = n * 10 + c - '0';
2977 	    msg_putchar(c);
2978 	}
2979 	else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H)
2980 	{
2981 	    n /= 10;
2982 	    MSG_PUTS("\b \b");
2983 	}
2984 	else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon)
2985 	{
2986 	    stuffcharReadbuff(':');
2987 	    if (!exmode_active)
2988 		cmdline_row = msg_row;
2989 	    skip_redraw = TRUE;	    /* skip redraw once */
2990 	    do_redraw = FALSE;
2991 	    break;
2992 	}
2993 	else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC)
2994 	    break;
2995     }
2996     --no_mapping;
2997     --allow_keys;
2998     return n;
2999 }
3000 
3001     void
3002 msgmore(n)
3003     long n;
3004 {
3005     long pn;
3006 
3007     if (global_busy	    /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */
3008 	    || keep_msg != NULL /* there is a message already, skip this one */
3009 	    || !messaging())  /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */
3010 	return;
3011 
3012     if (n > 0)
3013 	pn = n;
3014     else
3015 	pn = -n;
3016 
3017     if (pn > p_report)
3018     {
3019 	if (pn == 1)
3020 	{
3021 	    if (n > 0)
3022 		STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line"));
3023 	    else
3024 		STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less"));
3025 	}
3026 	else
3027 	{
3028 	    if (n > 0)
3029 		sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn);
3030 	    else
3031 		sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn);
3032 	}
3033 	if (got_int)
3034 	    STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)"));
3035 	if (msg(msg_buf))
3036 	{
3037 	    set_keep_msg(msg_buf);
3038 	    keep_msg_attr = 0;
3039 	}
3040     }
3041 }
3042 
3043 /*
3044  * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error
3045  */
3046     void
3047 beep_flush()
3048 {
3049     if (emsg_silent == 0)
3050     {
3051 	flush_buffers(FALSE);
3052 	vim_beep();
3053     }
3054 }
3055 
3056 /*
3057  * give a warning for an error
3058  */
3059     void
3060 vim_beep()
3061 {
3062     if (emsg_silent == 0)
3063     {
3064 	if (p_vb
3065 #ifdef FEAT_GUI
3066 		/* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI
3067 		 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */
3068 		&& !(gui.in_use && gui.starting)
3069 #endif
3070 		)
3071 	{
3072 	    out_str(T_VB);
3073 	}
3074 	else
3075 	{
3076 #ifdef MSDOS
3077 	    /*
3078 	     * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait
3079 	     * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems
3080 	     * where the beeps don't overlap.
3081 	     */
3082 	    if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10)
3083 	    {
3084 		out_char(BELL);
3085 		beep_count = 1;
3086 	    }
3087 	    else
3088 		++beep_count;
3089 #else
3090 	    out_char(BELL);
3091 #endif
3092 	}
3093     }
3094 }
3095 
3096 /*
3097  * To get the "real" home directory:
3098  * - get value of $HOME
3099  * For Unix:
3100  *  - go to that directory
3101  *  - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory.
3102  *  This also works with mounts and links.
3103  *  Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive.
3104  */
3105 static char_u	*homedir = NULL;
3106 
3107     void
3108 init_homedir()
3109 {
3110     char_u  *var;
3111 
3112 #ifdef VMS
3113     var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
3114 #else
3115     var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
3116 #endif
3117 
3118     if (var != NULL && *var == NUL)	/* empty is same as not set */
3119 	var = NULL;
3120 
3121 #ifdef WIN3264
3122     /*
3123      * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another
3124      * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%".  Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set
3125      * when $HOME is being set.
3126      */
3127     if (var != NULL && *var == '%')
3128     {
3129 	char_u	*p;
3130 	char_u	*exp;
3131 
3132 	p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%');
3133 	if (p != NULL)
3134 	{
3135 	    STRNCPY(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1));
3136 	    NameBuff[p - (var + 1)] = NUL;
3137 	    exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff);
3138 	    if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL
3139 					&& STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL)
3140 	    {
3141 		sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", exp, p + 1);
3142 		var = NameBuff;
3143 		/* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3144 		vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3145 	    }
3146 	}
3147     }
3148 
3149     /*
3150      * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has
3151      * specifically defined it for Vim's sake.  However, on Windows NT
3152      * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for
3153      * each user.  Try constructing $HOME from these.
3154      */
3155     if (var == NULL)
3156     {
3157 	char_u *homedrive, *homepath;
3158 
3159 	homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE");
3160 	homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH");
3161 	if (homedrive != NULL && homepath != NULL
3162 			   && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL)
3163 	{
3164 	    sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath);
3165 	    if (NameBuff[0] != NUL)
3166 	    {
3167 		var = NameBuff;
3168 		/* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3169 		vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3170 	    }
3171 	}
3172     }
3173 #endif
3174 
3175 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3176     /*
3177      * Default home dir is C:/
3178      * Best assumption we can make in such a situation.
3179      */
3180     if (var == NULL)
3181 	var = "C:/";
3182 #endif
3183     if (var != NULL)
3184     {
3185 #ifdef UNIX
3186 	/*
3187 	 * Change to the directory and get the actual path.  This resolves
3188 	 * links.  Don't do it when we can't return.
3189 	 */
3190 	if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK
3191 					  && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0)
3192 	{
3193 	    if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK)
3194 		var = IObuff;
3195 	    if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0)
3196 		EMSG(_(e_prev_dir));
3197 	}
3198 #endif
3199 	homedir = vim_strsave(var);
3200     }
3201 }
3202 
3203 /*
3204  * Expand environment variable with path name.
3205  * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME.	For Unix "~user/" is expanded.
3206  * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$".
3207  * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src.
3208  */
3209     void
3210 expand_env(src, dst, dstlen)
3211     char_u	*src;		/* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3212     char_u	*dst;		/* where to put the result */
3213     int		dstlen;		/* maximum length of the result */
3214 {
3215     expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE);
3216 }
3217 
3218     void
3219 expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, esc)
3220     char_u	*src;		/* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3221     char_u	*dst;		/* where to put the result */
3222     int		dstlen;		/* maximum length of the result */
3223     int		esc;		/* escape spaces in expanded variables */
3224 {
3225     char_u	*tail;
3226     int		c;
3227     char_u	*var;
3228     int		copy_char;
3229     int		mustfree;	/* var was allocated, need to free it later */
3230     int		at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */
3231 
3232     src = skipwhite(src);
3233     --dstlen;		    /* leave one char space for "\," */
3234     while (*src && dstlen > 0)
3235     {
3236 	copy_char = TRUE;
3237 	if (*src == '$'
3238 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3239 		|| *src == '%'
3240 #endif
3241 		|| (*src == '~' && at_start))
3242 	{
3243 	    mustfree = FALSE;
3244 
3245 	    /*
3246 	     * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may
3247 	     * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended.
3248 	     */
3249 	    if (*src != '~')				/* environment var */
3250 	    {
3251 		tail = src + 1;
3252 		var = dst;
3253 		c = dstlen - 1;
3254 
3255 #ifdef UNIX
3256 		/* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */
3257 		if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{'))
3258 		{
3259 		    tail++;	/* ignore '{' */
3260 		    while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}')
3261 			*var++ = *tail++;
3262 		}
3263 		else
3264 #endif
3265 		{
3266 		    while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail))
3267 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3268 			    || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3269 #endif
3270 			    ))
3271 		    {
3272 #ifdef OS2		/* env vars only in uppercase */
3273 			*var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail);
3274 			tail++;	    /* toupper() may be a macro! */
3275 #else
3276 			*var++ = *tail++;
3277 #endif
3278 		    }
3279 		}
3280 
3281 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3282 # ifdef UNIX
3283 		if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}')
3284 # else
3285 		if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3286 # endif
3287 		    var = NULL;
3288 		else
3289 		{
3290 # ifdef UNIX
3291 		    if (src[1] == '{')
3292 # else
3293 		    if (*src == '%')
3294 #endif
3295 			++tail;
3296 #endif
3297 		    *var = NUL;
3298 		    var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree);
3299 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3300 		}
3301 #endif
3302 	    }
3303 							/* home directory */
3304 	    else if (  src[1] == NUL
3305 		    || vim_ispathsep(src[1])
3306 		    || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL)
3307 	    {
3308 		var = homedir;
3309 		tail = src + 1;
3310 	    }
3311 	    else					/* user directory */
3312 	    {
3313 #if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME))
3314 		/*
3315 		 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it.
3316 		 */
3317 		tail = src;
3318 		var = dst;
3319 		c = dstlen - 1;
3320 		while (	   c-- > 0
3321 			&& *tail
3322 			&& vim_isfilec(*tail)
3323 			&& !vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3324 		    *var++ = *tail++;
3325 		*var = NUL;
3326 # ifdef UNIX
3327 		/*
3328 		 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it.
3329 		 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to
3330 		 * expand ~user.  This is slower and may fail if the shell
3331 		 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh).
3332 		 */
3333 #  if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H)
3334 		{
3335 		    struct passwd *pw;
3336 
3337 		    pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1);
3338 		    if (pw != NULL)
3339 			var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir;
3340 		    else
3341 			var = NULL;
3342 		}
3343 		if (var == NULL)
3344 #  endif
3345 		{
3346 		    expand_T	xpc;
3347 
3348 		    ExpandInit(&xpc);
3349 		    xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES;
3350 		    var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL,
3351 				WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE);
3352 		    ExpandCleanup(&xpc);
3353 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3354 		}
3355 
3356 # else	/* !UNIX, thus VMS */
3357 		/*
3358 		 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of
3359 		 * directories to search for the user account in.
3360 		 */
3361 		{
3362 		    char_u	test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL];
3363 		    char_u	*path, *next_path, *ptr;
3364 		    struct stat	st;
3365 
3366 		    STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME);
3367 		    next_path = paths;
3368 		    while (*next_path)
3369 		    {
3370 			for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ',';
3371 				next_path++);
3372 			if (*next_path)
3373 			    *next_path++ = NUL;
3374 			STRCPY(test, path);
3375 			STRCAT(test, "/");
3376 			STRCAT(test, dst + 1);
3377 			if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0)
3378 			{
3379 			    var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1);
3380 			    STRCPY(var, test);
3381 			    mustfree = TRUE;
3382 			    break;
3383 			}
3384 		    }
3385 		}
3386 # endif /* UNIX */
3387 #else
3388 		/* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */
3389 		var = NULL;
3390 		tail = (char_u *)"";	/* for gcc */
3391 #endif /* UNIX || VMS */
3392 	    }
3393 
3394 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
3395 	    /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes.
3396 	     * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */
3397 	    if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL)
3398 	    {
3399 		char_u	*p = vim_strsave(var);
3400 
3401 		if (p != NULL)
3402 		{
3403 		    if (mustfree)
3404 			vim_free(var);
3405 		    var = p;
3406 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3407 		    forward_slash(var);
3408 		}
3409 	    }
3410 #endif
3411 
3412 	    /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash.
3413 	     * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */
3414 	    if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL)
3415 	    {
3416 		char_u	*p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t");
3417 
3418 		if (p != NULL)
3419 		{
3420 		    if (mustfree)
3421 			vim_free(var);
3422 		    var = p;
3423 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3424 		}
3425 	    }
3426 
3427 	    if (var != NULL && *var != NUL
3428 		    && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen))
3429 	    {
3430 		STRCPY(dst, var);
3431 		dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var);
3432 		dst += STRLEN(var);
3433 		/* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts
3434 		 * with it, skip a character */
3435 		if (*var != NUL && vim_ispathsep(dst[-1])
3436 #if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA)
3437 			&& dst[-1] != ':'
3438 #endif
3439 			&& vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3440 		    ++tail;
3441 		src = tail;
3442 		copy_char = FALSE;
3443 	    }
3444 	    if (mustfree)
3445 		vim_free(var);
3446 	}
3447 
3448 	if (copy_char)	    /* copy at least one char */
3449 	{
3450 	    /*
3451 	     * Recogize the start of a new name, for '~'.
3452 	     */
3453 	    at_start = FALSE;
3454 	    if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL)
3455 	    {
3456 		*dst++ = *src++;
3457 		--dstlen;
3458 	    }
3459 	    else if (src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',')
3460 		at_start = TRUE;
3461 	    *dst++ = *src++;
3462 	    --dstlen;
3463 	}
3464     }
3465     *dst = NUL;
3466 }
3467 
3468 /*
3469  * Vim's version of getenv().
3470  * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME.
3471  */
3472     char_u *
3473 vim_getenv(name, mustfree)
3474     char_u	*name;
3475     int		*mustfree;	/* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */
3476 {
3477     char_u	*p;
3478     char_u	*pend;
3479     int		vimruntime;
3480 
3481 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3482     /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */
3483     if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0)
3484 	return homedir;
3485 #endif
3486 
3487     p = mch_getenv(name);
3488     if (p != NULL && *p == NUL)	    /* empty is the same as not set */
3489 	p = NULL;
3490 
3491     if (p != NULL)
3492 	return p;
3493 
3494     vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0);
3495     if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0)
3496 	return NULL;
3497 
3498     /*
3499      * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM.
3500      * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty.
3501      */
3502     if (vimruntime
3503 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3504 	    && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL
3505 #endif
3506        )
3507     {
3508 	p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3509 	if (p != NULL && *p == NUL)	    /* empty is the same as not set */
3510 	    p = NULL;
3511 	if (p != NULL)
3512 	{
3513 	    p = vim_version_dir(p);
3514 	    if (p != NULL)
3515 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3516 	    else
3517 		p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3518 	}
3519     }
3520 
3521     /*
3522      * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using:
3523      * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$')
3524      * - the executable name from argv[0]
3525      */
3526     if (p == NULL)
3527     {
3528 	if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL)
3529 	    p = p_hf;
3530 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3531 	/*
3532 	 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0].
3533 	 */
3534 	else
3535 	    p = exe_name;
3536 #endif
3537 	if (p != NULL)
3538 	{
3539 	    /* remove the file name */
3540 	    pend = gettail(p);
3541 
3542 	    /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */
3543 	    if (p == p_hf)
3544 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc");
3545 
3546 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3547 # ifdef MACOS_X
3548 	    /* remove "build/..." from exe_name, if present */
3549 	    if (p == exe_name)
3550 	    {
3551 		char_u	*pend1;
3552 		char_u  *pend2;
3553 
3554 		pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"Contents/MacOS");
3555 		pend2 = remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend1, (char_u *)".app");
3556 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend2, (char_u *)"build");
3557 		/* When runnig from project builder get rid of the
3558 		 * build/???.app, otherwise keep the ???.app */
3559 		if (pend2 == pend)
3560 		    pend = pend1;
3561 	    }
3562 # endif
3563 	    /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */
3564 	    if (p == exe_name)
3565 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src");
3566 #endif
3567 
3568 	    /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */
3569 	    if (!vimruntime)
3570 	    {
3571 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME);
3572 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT);
3573 	    }
3574 
3575 	    /* remove trailing path separator */
3576 #ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC
3577 	    /* With MacOS path (with  colons) the final colon is required */
3578 	    /* to avoid confusion between absoulute and relative path */
3579 	    if (pend > p && vim_ispathsep(*(pend - 1)))
3580 		--pend;
3581 #endif
3582 
3583 	    /* check that the result is a directory name */
3584 	    p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p));
3585 
3586 	    if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p))
3587 	    {
3588 		vim_free(p);
3589 		p = NULL;
3590 	    }
3591 	    else
3592 	    {
3593 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3594 		/* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */
3595 		if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL)
3596 		{
3597 		    vim_free(p);
3598 		    p = pend;
3599 		}
3600 #endif
3601 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3602 	    }
3603 	}
3604     }
3605 
3606 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3607     /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and
3608      * default_vimruntime_dir */
3609     if (p == NULL)
3610     {
3611 	/* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */
3612 	if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL)
3613 	{
3614 	    p = default_vimruntime_dir;
3615 	    *mustfree = FALSE;
3616 	}
3617 	else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL)
3618 	{
3619 	    if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL)
3620 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3621 	    else
3622 	    {
3623 		p = default_vim_dir;
3624 		*mustfree = FALSE;
3625 	    }
3626 	}
3627     }
3628 #endif
3629 
3630     /*
3631      * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast
3632      * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl).
3633      */
3634     if (p != NULL)
3635     {
3636 	if (vimruntime)
3637 	{
3638 	    vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p);
3639 	    didset_vimruntime = TRUE;
3640 #ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT
3641 	    {
3642 		char_u	*buf = alloc((unsigned int)STRLEN(p) + 6);
3643 
3644 		if (buf != NULL)
3645 		{
3646 		    STRCPY(buf, p);
3647 		    STRCAT(buf, "/lang");
3648 		    bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf);
3649 		    vim_free(buf);
3650 		}
3651 	    }
3652 #endif
3653 	}
3654 	else
3655 	{
3656 	    vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p);
3657 	    didset_vim = TRUE;
3658 	}
3659     }
3660     return p;
3661 }
3662 
3663 /*
3664  * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists.
3665  * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise.
3666  */
3667     static char_u *
3668 vim_version_dir(vimdir)
3669     char_u	*vimdir;
3670 {
3671     char_u	*p;
3672 
3673     if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL)
3674 	return NULL;
3675     p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE);
3676     if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3677 	return p;
3678     vim_free(p);
3679     p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE);
3680     if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3681 	return p;
3682     vim_free(p);
3683     return NULL;
3684 }
3685 
3686 /*
3687  * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus
3688  * the length of "name/".  Otherwise return "pend".
3689  */
3690     static char_u *
3691 remove_tail(p, pend, name)
3692     char_u	*p;
3693     char_u	*pend;
3694     char_u	*name;
3695 {
3696     int		len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1;
3697     char_u	*newend = pend - len;
3698 
3699     if (newend >= p
3700 	    && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0
3701 	    && (newend == p || vim_ispathsep(*(newend - 1))))
3702 	return newend;
3703     return pend;
3704 }
3705 
3706 #if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
3707 /*
3708  * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "???.ext/", return "pend"
3709  * minus the length of "???.ext/".  Otherwise return "pend".
3710  */
3711     static char_u *
3712 remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend, ext)
3713     char_u	*p;
3714     char_u	*pend;
3715     char_u	*ext;
3716 {
3717     int		len = (int)STRLEN(ext) + 1;
3718     char_u	*newend = pend - len;
3719 
3720     if (newend >= p && fnamencmp(newend, ext, len - 1) == 0)
3721 	while (newend != p && !vim_ispathsep(*(newend - 1)))
3722 	    --newend;
3723     if (newend == p || vim_ispathsep(*(newend - 1)))
3724 	return newend;
3725     return pend;
3726 }
3727 #endif
3728 
3729 /*
3730  * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string.
3731  * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed
3732  * again soon.
3733  */
3734     char_u *
3735 expand_env_save(src)
3736     char_u	*src;
3737 {
3738     char_u	*p;
3739 
3740     p = alloc(MAXPATHL);
3741     if (p != NULL)
3742 	expand_env(src, p, MAXPATHL);
3743     return p;
3744 }
3745 
3746 /*
3747  * Our portable version of setenv.
3748  */
3749     void
3750 vim_setenv(name, val)
3751     char_u	*name;
3752     char_u	*val;
3753 {
3754 #ifdef HAVE_SETENV
3755     mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1);
3756 #else
3757     char_u	*envbuf;
3758 
3759     /*
3760      * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain
3761      * valid.  The allocated memory will never be freed.
3762      */
3763     envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2));
3764     if (envbuf != NULL)
3765     {
3766 	sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val);
3767 	putenv((char *)envbuf);
3768     }
3769 #endif
3770 }
3771 
3772 #if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
3773 /*
3774  * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name.
3775  */
3776 /*ARGSUSED*/
3777     char_u *
3778 get_env_name(xp, idx)
3779     expand_T	*xp;
3780     int		idx;
3781 {
3782 # if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__)
3783     /*
3784      * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW).
3785      */
3786     return NULL;
3787 # else
3788 # ifndef __WIN32__
3789     /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */
3790     extern char		**environ;
3791 # endif
3792     static char_u	name[100];
3793     char_u		*str;
3794     int			n;
3795 
3796     str = (char_u *)environ[idx];
3797     if (str == NULL)
3798 	return NULL;
3799 
3800     for (n = 0; n < 99; ++n)
3801     {
3802 	if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL)
3803 	    break;
3804 	name[n] = str[n];
3805     }
3806     name[n] = NUL;
3807     return name;
3808 # endif
3809 }
3810 #endif
3811 
3812 /*
3813  * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in
3814  * 'src'.
3815  * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src.
3816  */
3817     void
3818 home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one)
3819     buf_T	*buf;	/* when not NULL, check for help files */
3820     char_u	*src;	/* input file name */
3821     char_u	*dst;	/* where to put the result */
3822     int		dstlen;	/* maximum length of the result */
3823     int		one;	/* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include
3824 			   spaces and commas in the file name. */
3825 {
3826     size_t	dirlen = 0, envlen = 0;
3827     size_t	len;
3828     char_u	*homedir_env;
3829     char_u	*p;
3830 
3831     if (src == NULL)
3832     {
3833 	*dst = NUL;
3834 	return;
3835     }
3836 
3837     /*
3838      * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely.
3839      */
3840     if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help)
3841     {
3842 	STRCPY(dst, gettail(src));
3843 	return;
3844     }
3845 
3846     /*
3847      * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the
3848      * "real" home directory.
3849      */
3850     if (homedir != NULL)
3851 	dirlen = STRLEN(homedir);
3852 
3853 #ifdef VMS
3854     homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
3855 #else
3856     homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
3857 #endif
3858 
3859     if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL)
3860 	homedir_env = NULL;
3861     if (homedir_env != NULL)
3862 	envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env);
3863 
3864     if (!one)
3865 	src = skipwhite(src);
3866     while (*src && dstlen > 0)
3867     {
3868 	/*
3869 	 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name.
3870 	 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches
3871 	 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/'
3872 	 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla",
3873 	 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up
3874 	 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user
3875 	 * er's home directory)).
3876 	 */
3877 	p = homedir;
3878 	len = dirlen;
3879 	for (;;)
3880 	{
3881 	    if (   len
3882 		&& fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0
3883 		&& (vim_ispathsep(src[len])
3884 		    || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' '))
3885 		    || src[len] == NUL))
3886 	    {
3887 		src += len;
3888 		if (--dstlen > 0)
3889 		    *dst++ = '~';
3890 
3891 		/*
3892 		 * If it's just the home directory, add  "/".
3893 		 */
3894 		if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0)
3895 		    *dst++ = '/';
3896 		break;
3897 	    }
3898 	    if (p == homedir_env)
3899 		break;
3900 	    p = homedir_env;
3901 	    len = envlen;
3902 	}
3903 
3904 	/* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */
3905 	while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0)
3906 	    *dst++ = *src++;
3907 	/* skip separator */
3908 	while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0)
3909 	    *dst++ = *src++;
3910     }
3911     /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */
3912 
3913     *dst = NUL;
3914 }
3915 
3916 /*
3917  * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory.
3918  * When something fails, NULL is returned.
3919  */
3920     char_u  *
3921 home_replace_save(buf, src)
3922     buf_T	*buf;	/* when not NULL, check for help files */
3923     char_u	*src;	/* input file name */
3924 {
3925     char_u	*dst;
3926     unsigned	len;
3927 
3928     len = 3;			/* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */
3929     if (src != NULL)		/* just in case */
3930 	len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src);
3931     dst = alloc(len);
3932     if (dst != NULL)
3933 	home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE);
3934     return dst;
3935 }
3936 
3937 /*
3938  * Compare two file names and return:
3939  * FPC_SAME   if they both exist and are the same file.
3940  * FPC_SAMEX  if they both don't exist and have the same file name.
3941  * FPC_DIFF   if they both exist and are different files.
3942  * FPC_NOTX   if they both don't exist.
3943  * FPC_DIFFX  if one of them doesn't exist.
3944  * For the first name environment variables are expanded
3945  */
3946     int
3947 fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname)
3948     char_u *s1, *s2;
3949     int	    checkname;		/* when both don't exist, check file names */
3950 {
3951 #ifdef UNIX
3952     char_u	    exp1[MAXPATHL];
3953     char_u	    full1[MAXPATHL];
3954     char_u	    full2[MAXPATHL];
3955     struct stat	    st1, st2;
3956     int		    r1, r2;
3957 
3958     expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
3959     r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1);
3960     r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2);
3961     if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0)
3962     {
3963 	/* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */
3964 	if (checkname)
3965 	{
3966 	    if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
3967 		return FPC_SAMEX;
3968 	    r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
3969 	    r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
3970 	    if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0)
3971 		return FPC_SAMEX;
3972 	}
3973 	return FPC_NOTX;
3974     }
3975     if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0)
3976 	return FPC_DIFFX;
3977     if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino)
3978 	return FPC_SAME;
3979     return FPC_DIFF;
3980 #else
3981     char_u  *exp1;		/* expanded s1 */
3982     char_u  *full1;		/* full path of s1 */
3983     char_u  *full2;		/* full path of s2 */
3984     int	    retval = FPC_DIFF;
3985     int	    r1, r2;
3986 
3987     /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */
3988     if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL)
3989     {
3990 	full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL;
3991 	full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL;
3992 
3993 	expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
3994 	r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
3995 	r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
3996 
3997 	/* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */
3998 	if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK)
3999 	{
4000 	    if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4001 		retval = FPC_SAMEX;
4002 	    else
4003 		retval = FPC_NOTX;
4004 	}
4005 	else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK)
4006 	    retval = FPC_DIFFX;
4007 	else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2))
4008 	    retval = FPC_DIFF;
4009 	else
4010 	    retval = FPC_SAME;
4011 	vim_free(exp1);
4012     }
4013     return retval;
4014 #endif
4015 }
4016 
4017 /*
4018  * Get the tail of a path: the file name.
4019  * Fail safe: never returns NULL.
4020  */
4021     char_u *
4022 gettail(fname)
4023     char_u *fname;
4024 {
4025     char_u  *p1, *p2;
4026 
4027     if (fname == NULL)
4028 	return (char_u *)"";
4029     for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; )	/* find last part of path */
4030     {
4031 	if (vim_ispathsep(*p2))
4032 	    p1 = p2 + 1;
4033 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
4034 	if (has_mbyte)
4035 	    p2 += (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p2);
4036 	else
4037 #endif
4038 	    ++p2;
4039     }
4040     return p1;
4041 }
4042 
4043 /*
4044  * get the next path component (just after the next path separator).
4045  */
4046     char_u *
4047 getnextcomp(fname)
4048     char_u *fname;
4049 {
4050     while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname))
4051 	++fname;
4052     if (*fname)
4053 	++fname;
4054     return fname;
4055 }
4056 
4057 #if defined(FEAT_MODIFY_FNAME) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) \
4058 	|| defined(FEAT_SESSION) || defined(MSWIN) \
4059 	|| ((defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) || defined(FEAT_GUI_KDE)) \
4060 			    && (defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(FEAT_DND))) \
4061 	|| defined(FEAT_SUN_WORKSHOP) || defined(FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG) \
4062 	|| defined(PROTO)
4063 /*
4064  * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name.
4065  * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head.
4066  * If there is no head, path is returned.
4067  */
4068     char_u *
4069 get_past_head(path)
4070     char_u  *path;
4071 {
4072     char_u  *retval;
4073 
4074 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
4075     /* may skip "c:" */
4076     if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':')
4077 	retval = path + 2;
4078     else
4079 	retval = path;
4080 #else
4081 # if defined(AMIGA)
4082     /* may skip "label:" */
4083     retval = vim_strchr(path, ':');
4084     if (retval == NULL)
4085 	retval = path;
4086 # else	/* Unix */
4087     retval = path;
4088 # endif
4089 #endif
4090 
4091     while (vim_ispathsep(*retval))
4092 	++retval;
4093 
4094     return retval;
4095 }
4096 #endif
4097 
4098 /*
4099  * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator.
4100  */
4101     int
4102 vim_ispathsep(c)
4103     int c;
4104 {
4105 #ifdef RISCOS
4106     return (c == '.' || c == ':');
4107 #else
4108 # ifdef UNIX
4109     return (c == '/');	    /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */
4110 # else
4111 #  ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
4112     return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\');
4113 #  else
4114 #   ifdef VMS
4115     /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */
4116     return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/'
4117 	    || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' );
4118 #   else
4119 #    ifdef COLON_AS_PATHSEP
4120     return (c == ':');
4121 #    else		/* Amiga */
4122     return (c == ':' || c == '/');
4123 #    endif
4124 #   endif /* VMS */
4125 #  endif
4126 # endif
4127 #endif /* RISC OS */
4128 }
4129 
4130 #if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO)
4131 /*
4132  * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator.
4133  */
4134     int
4135 vim_ispathlistsep(c)
4136     int c;
4137 {
4138 #ifdef UNIX
4139     return (c == ':');
4140 #else
4141     return (c == ';');	/* might not be rigth for every system... */
4142 #endif
4143 }
4144 #endif
4145 
4146 #if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \
4147 	|| defined(PROTO)
4148 /*
4149  * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally.
4150  */
4151     int
4152 vim_fnamecmp(x, y)
4153     char_u	*x, *y;
4154 {
4155     return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL);
4156 }
4157 
4158     int
4159 vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len)
4160     char_u	*x, *y;
4161     size_t	len;
4162 {
4163     while (len > 0 && *x && *y)
4164     {
4165 	if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y)
4166 		&& !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\')
4167 		&& !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/'))
4168 	    break;
4169 	++x;
4170 	++y;
4171 	--len;
4172     }
4173     if (len == 0)
4174 	return 0;
4175     return (*x - *y);
4176 }
4177 #endif
4178 
4179 /*
4180  * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory.
4181  * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is neccesary.
4182  */
4183     char_u  *
4184 concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep)
4185     char_u  *fname1;
4186     char_u  *fname2;
4187     int	    sep;
4188 {
4189     char_u  *dest;
4190 
4191     dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3));
4192     if (dest != NULL)
4193     {
4194 	STRCPY(dest, fname1);
4195 	if (sep)
4196 	    add_pathsep(dest);
4197 	STRCAT(dest, fname2);
4198     }
4199     return dest;
4200 }
4201 
4202 /*
4203  * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path
4204  * separator.
4205  */
4206     void
4207 add_pathsep(p)
4208     char_u	*p;
4209 {
4210     if (*p != NUL && !vim_ispathsep(*(p + STRLEN(p) - 1)))
4211 	STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR);
4212 }
4213 
4214 /*
4215  * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name.
4216  * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4217  */
4218     char_u  *
4219 FullName_save(fname, force)
4220     char_u	*fname;
4221     int		force;	    /* force expansion, even when it already looks
4222 			       like a full path name */
4223 {
4224     char_u	*buf;
4225     char_u	*new_fname = NULL;
4226 
4227     if (fname == NULL)
4228 	return NULL;
4229 
4230     buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL);
4231     if (buf != NULL)
4232     {
4233 	if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL)
4234 	    new_fname = vim_strsave(buf);
4235 	else
4236 	    new_fname = vim_strsave(fname);
4237 	vim_free(buf);
4238     }
4239     return new_fname;
4240 }
4241 
4242 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL)
4243 
4244 static char_u	*skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p));
4245 
4246 /*
4247  * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now.
4248  * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards.
4249  */
4250     pos_T *
4251 find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
4252     int		ind_maxcomment;
4253 {
4254     pos_T	*pos;
4255     char_u	*line;
4256     char_u	*p;
4257 
4258     if ((pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, ind_maxcomment)) == NULL)
4259 	return NULL;
4260 
4261     /*
4262      * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string.
4263      */
4264     line = ml_get(pos->lnum);
4265     for (p = line; *p && (unsigned)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p)
4266 	p = skip_string(p);
4267     if ((unsigned)(p - line) > pos->col)
4268 	return NULL;
4269     return pos;
4270 }
4271 
4272 /*
4273  * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character.
4274  * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified.
4275  */
4276     static char_u *
4277 skip_string(p)
4278     char_u  *p;
4279 {
4280     int	    i;
4281 
4282     /*
4283      * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time".
4284      */
4285     for ( ; ; ++p)
4286     {
4287 	if (p[0] == '\'')		    /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */
4288 	{
4289 	    if (!p[1])			    /* ' at end of line */
4290 		break;
4291 	    i = 2;
4292 	    if (p[1] == '\\')		    /* '\n' or '\000' */
4293 	    {
4294 		++i;
4295 		while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1]))   /* '\000' */
4296 		    ++i;
4297 	    }
4298 	    if (p[i] == '\'')		    /* check for trailing ' */
4299 	    {
4300 		p += i;
4301 		continue;
4302 	    }
4303 	}
4304 	else if (p[0] == '"')		    /* start of string */
4305 	{
4306 	    for (++p; p[0]; ++p)
4307 	    {
4308 		if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL)
4309 		    ++p;
4310 		else if (p[0] == '"')	    /* end of string */
4311 		    break;
4312 	    }
4313 	    if (p[0] == '"')
4314 		continue;
4315 	}
4316 	break;				    /* no string found */
4317     }
4318     if (!*p)
4319 	--p;				    /* backup from NUL */
4320     return p;
4321 }
4322 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */
4323 
4324 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO)
4325 
4326 /*
4327  * Do C or expression indenting on the current line.
4328  */
4329     void
4330 do_c_expr_indent()
4331 {
4332 # ifdef FEAT_EVAL
4333     if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL)
4334 	fixthisline(get_expr_indent);
4335     else
4336 # endif
4337 	fixthisline(get_c_indent);
4338 }
4339 
4340 /*
4341  * Functions for C-indenting.
4342  * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer.
4343  */
4344 /*
4345  * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line.
4346  */
4347 
4348 static char_u	*cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4349 static int	cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *));
4350 static pos_T	*find_line_comment __ARGS((void));
4351 static int	cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **));
4352 static int	cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *));
4353 static char_u	*after_label __ARGS((char_u *l));
4354 static int	get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4355 static int	skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment));
4356 static int	cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void));
4357 static int	cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4358 static int	cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *));
4359 static int	cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump));
4360 static int	cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4361 static int	cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4362 static int	cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int));
4363 static int	cin_isinit __ARGS((void));
4364 static int	cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T));
4365 static int	cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *));
4366 static int	cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *));
4367 static int	cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *));
4368 static int	cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int));
4369 static int	cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *));
4370 static int	cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((char_u *line, colnr_T *col));
4371 static int	cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *));
4372 static int	cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos));
4373 static pos_T	*find_start_brace __ARGS((int));
4374 static pos_T	*find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int));
4375 static int	corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos));
4376 static int	find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end));
4377 static int	find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
4378 
4379 /*
4380  * Skip over white space and C comments within the line.
4381  */
4382     static char_u *
4383 cin_skipcomment(s)
4384     char_u	*s;
4385 {
4386     while (*s)
4387     {
4388 	s = skipwhite(s);
4389 	if (*s != '/')
4390 	    break;
4391 	++s;
4392 	if (*s == '/')		/* slash-slash comment continues till eol */
4393 	{
4394 	    s += STRLEN(s);
4395 	    break;
4396 	}
4397 	if (*s != '*')
4398 	    break;
4399 	for (++s; *s; ++s)	/* skip slash-star comment */
4400 	    if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/')
4401 	    {
4402 		s += 2;
4403 		break;
4404 	    }
4405     }
4406     return s;
4407 }
4408 
4409 /*
4410  * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s.  White space and comments are
4411  * not considered code.
4412  */
4413     static int
4414 cin_nocode(s)
4415     char_u	*s;
4416 {
4417     return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL;
4418 }
4419 
4420 /*
4421  * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines.
4422  */
4423     static pos_T *
4424 find_line_comment() /* XXX */
4425 {
4426     static pos_T pos;
4427     char_u	 *line;
4428     char_u	 *p;
4429 
4430     pos = curwin->w_cursor;
4431     while (--pos.lnum > 0)
4432     {
4433 	line = ml_get(pos.lnum);
4434 	p = skipwhite(line);
4435 	if (cin_islinecomment(p))
4436 	{
4437 	    pos.col = (int)(p - line);
4438 	    return &pos;
4439 	}
4440 	if (*p != NUL)
4441 	    break;
4442     }
4443     return NULL;
4444 }
4445 
4446 /*
4447  * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true.
4448  */
4449     static int
4450 cin_islabel_skip(s)
4451     char_u	**s;
4452 {
4453     if (!vim_isIDc(**s))	    /* need at least one ID character */
4454 	return FALSE;
4455 
4456     while (vim_isIDc(**s))
4457 	(*s)++;
4458 
4459     *s = cin_skipcomment(*s);
4460 
4461     /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */
4462     return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':');
4463 }
4464 
4465 /*
4466  * Recognize a label: "label:".
4467  * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label.
4468  */
4469     int
4470 cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)		/* XXX */
4471     int		ind_maxcomment;
4472 {
4473     char_u	*s;
4474 
4475     s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4476 
4477     /*
4478      * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented
4479      * like a switch label.  Same for C++ scope declarations.
4480      */
4481     if (cin_isdefault(s))
4482 	return FALSE;
4483     if (cin_isscopedecl(s))
4484 	return FALSE;
4485 
4486     if (cin_islabel_skip(&s))
4487     {
4488 	/*
4489 	 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case
4490 	 * label.
4491 	 */
4492 	pos_T	cursor_save;
4493 	pos_T	*trypos;
4494 	char_u	*line;
4495 
4496 	cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4497 	while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
4498 	{
4499 	    --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
4500 
4501 	    /*
4502 	     * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
4503 	     */
4504 	    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
4505 	    if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
4506 		curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
4507 
4508 	    line = ml_get_curline();
4509 	    if (cin_ispreproc(line))	/* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
4510 		continue;
4511 	    if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL)
4512 		continue;
4513 
4514 	    curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4515 	    if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE)
4516 		    || cin_isscopedecl(line)
4517 		    || cin_iscase(line)
4518 		    || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line)))
4519 		return TRUE;
4520 	    return FALSE;
4521 	}
4522 	curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4523 	return TRUE;		/* label at start of file??? */
4524     }
4525     return FALSE;
4526 }
4527 
4528 /*
4529  * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations.
4530  * Q&D-Implementation:
4531  * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line.
4532  */
4533     static int
4534 cin_isinit(void)
4535 {
4536     char_u	*s;
4537 
4538     s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4539 
4540     if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7]))
4541 	s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7);
4542 
4543     if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4544 	return TRUE;
4545 
4546     if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{"))
4547 	return TRUE;
4548 
4549     return FALSE;
4550 }
4551 
4552 /*
4553  * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:".
4554  */
4555      int
4556 cin_iscase(s)
4557     char_u *s;
4558 {
4559     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4560     if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4561     {
4562 	for (s += 4; *s; ++s)
4563 	{
4564 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4565 	    if (*s == ':')
4566 	    {
4567 		if (s[1] == ':')	/* skip over "::" for C++ */
4568 		    ++s;
4569 		else
4570 		    return TRUE;
4571 	    }
4572 	    if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'')
4573 		s += 2;			/* skip over '.' */
4574 	    else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/'))
4575 		return FALSE;		/* stop at comment */
4576 	    else if (*s == '"')
4577 		return FALSE;		/* stop at string */
4578 	}
4579 	return FALSE;
4580     }
4581 
4582     if (cin_isdefault(s))
4583 	return TRUE;
4584     return FALSE;
4585 }
4586 
4587 /*
4588  * Recognize a "default" switch label.
4589  */
4590     static int
4591 cin_isdefault(s)
4592     char_u  *s;
4593 {
4594     return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0
4595 	    && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':'
4596 	    && s[1] != ':');
4597 }
4598 
4599 /*
4600  * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label.
4601  */
4602     int
4603 cin_isscopedecl(s)
4604     char_u	*s;
4605 {
4606     int		i;
4607 
4608     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4609     if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0)
4610 	i = 6;
4611     else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0)
4612 	i = 9;
4613     else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0)
4614 	i = 7;
4615     else
4616 	return FALSE;
4617     return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':');
4618 }
4619 
4620 /*
4621  * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'.
4622  * Return NULL if not found.
4623  *	  case 234:    a = b;
4624  *		       ^
4625  */
4626     static char_u *
4627 after_label(l)
4628     char_u  *l;
4629 {
4630     for ( ; *l; ++l)
4631     {
4632 	if (*l == ':')
4633 	{
4634 	    if (l[1] == ':')	    /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4635 		++l;
4636 	    else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1))
4637 		break;
4638 	}
4639 	else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'')
4640 	    l += 2;		    /* skip over 'x' */
4641     }
4642     if (*l == NUL)
4643 	return NULL;
4644     l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1);
4645     if (*l == NUL)
4646 	return NULL;
4647     return l;
4648 }
4649 
4650 /*
4651  * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label.
4652  * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label.
4653  */
4654     static int
4655 get_indent_nolabel(lnum)		/* XXX */
4656     linenr_T	lnum;
4657 {
4658     char_u	*l;
4659     pos_T	fp;
4660     colnr_T	col;
4661     char_u	*p;
4662 
4663     l = ml_get(lnum);
4664     p = after_label(l);
4665     if (p == NULL)
4666 	return 0;
4667 
4668     fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l);
4669     fp.lnum = lnum;
4670     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
4671     return (int)col;
4672 }
4673 
4674 /*
4675  * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label.
4676  * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label).
4677  *   label:	if (asdf && asdfasdf)
4678  *		^
4679  */
4680     static int
4681 skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment)
4682     linenr_T	lnum;
4683     char_u	**pp;
4684     int		ind_maxcomment;
4685 {
4686     char_u	*l;
4687     int		amount;
4688     pos_T	cursor_save;
4689 
4690     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4691     curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
4692     l = ml_get_curline();
4693 				    /* XXX */
4694     if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
4695     {
4696 	amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum);
4697 	l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
4698 	if (l == NULL)		/* just in case */
4699 	    l = ml_get_curline();
4700     }
4701     else
4702     {
4703 	amount = get_indent();
4704 	l = ml_get_curline();
4705     }
4706     *pp = l;
4707 
4708     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4709     return amount;
4710 }
4711 
4712 /*
4713  * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration.
4714  *  int	    a,			indent of "a"
4715  *  static struct foo    b,	indent of "b"
4716  *  enum bla    c,		indent of "c"
4717  * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration.
4718  */
4719     static int
4720 cin_first_id_amount()
4721 {
4722     char_u	*line, *p, *s;
4723     int		len;
4724     pos_T	fp;
4725     colnr_T	col;
4726 
4727     line = ml_get_curline();
4728     p = skipwhite(line);
4729     len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
4730     if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0)
4731     {
4732 	p = skipwhite(p + 6);
4733 	len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
4734     }
4735     if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0)
4736 	p = skipwhite(p + 6);
4737     else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0)
4738 	p = skipwhite(p + 4);
4739     else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0)
4740 	    || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0))
4741     {
4742 	s = skipwhite(p + len);
4743 	if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3]))
4744 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))
4745 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5]))
4746 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])))
4747 	    p = s;
4748     }
4749     for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len)
4750 	;
4751     if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p))
4752 	return 0;
4753 
4754     p = skipwhite(p + len);
4755     fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
4756     fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
4757     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
4758     return (int)col;
4759 }
4760 
4761 /*
4762  * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign.
4763  *       char *foo = "here";
4764  * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found.
4765  * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash.
4766  *      foo = "asdf\
4767  *	       asdf\
4768  *	       here";
4769  */
4770     static int
4771 cin_get_equal_amount(lnum)
4772     linenr_T	lnum;
4773 {
4774     char_u	*line;
4775     char_u	*s;
4776     colnr_T	col;
4777     pos_T	fp;
4778 
4779     if (lnum > 1)
4780     {
4781 	line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
4782 	if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\')
4783 	    return -1;
4784     }
4785 
4786     line = s = ml_get(lnum);
4787     while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL)
4788     {
4789 	if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
4790 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4791 	else
4792 	    ++s;
4793     }
4794     if (*s != '=')
4795 	return 0;
4796 
4797     s = skipwhite(s + 1);
4798     if (cin_nocode(s))
4799 	return 0;
4800 
4801     if (*s == '"')	/* nice alignment for continued strings */
4802 	++s;
4803 
4804     fp.lnum = lnum;
4805     fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
4806     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
4807     return (int)col;
4808 }
4809 
4810 /*
4811  * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'.
4812  */
4813     static int
4814 cin_ispreproc(s)
4815     char_u *s;
4816 {
4817     s = skipwhite(s);
4818     if (*s == '#')
4819 	return TRUE;
4820     return FALSE;
4821 }
4822 
4823 /*
4824  * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a
4825  * continuation line of a preprocessor statement.  Decrease "*lnump" to the
4826  * start and return the line in "*pp".
4827  */
4828     static int
4829 cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump)
4830     char_u	**pp;
4831     linenr_T	*lnump;
4832 {
4833     char_u	*line = *pp;
4834     linenr_T	lnum = *lnump;
4835     int		retval = FALSE;
4836 
4837     while (1)
4838     {
4839 	if (cin_ispreproc(line))
4840 	{
4841 	    retval = TRUE;
4842 	    *lnump = lnum;
4843 	    break;
4844 	}
4845 	if (lnum == 1)
4846 	    break;
4847 	line = ml_get(--lnum);
4848 	if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\')
4849 	    break;
4850     }
4851 
4852     if (lnum != *lnump)
4853 	*pp = ml_get(*lnump);
4854     return retval;
4855 }
4856 
4857 /*
4858  * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment.
4859  */
4860     static int
4861 cin_iscomment(p)
4862     char_u  *p;
4863 {
4864     return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/'));
4865 }
4866 
4867 /*
4868  * Recognize the start of a "//" comment.
4869  */
4870     static int
4871 cin_islinecomment(p)
4872     char_u *p;
4873 {
4874     return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/');
4875 }
4876 
4877 /*
4878  * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'.
4879  * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line.
4880  * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if
4881  * both apply in order to determine initializations).
4882  */
4883     static int
4884 cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma)
4885     char_u	*s;
4886     int		incl_open;	/* include '{' at the end as terminator */
4887     int		incl_comma;	/* recognize a trailing comma */
4888 {
4889     char_u found_start = 0;
4890 
4891     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4892 
4893     if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s)))
4894 	found_start = *s;
4895 
4896     while (*s)
4897     {
4898 	/* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */
4899 	s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s));
4900 	if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}'
4901 						 || (incl_comma && *s == ','))
4902 		&& cin_nocode(s + 1))
4903 	    return *s;
4904 
4905 	if (*s)
4906 	    s++;
4907     }
4908     return found_start;
4909 }
4910 
4911 /*
4912  * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to
4913  * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and
4914  * no semicolons anywhere.
4915  * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line.
4916  * "sp" points to a string with the line.  When looking at other lines it must
4917  * be restored to the line.  When it's NULL fetch lines here.
4918  * "lnum" is where we start looking.
4919  */
4920     static int
4921 cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum)
4922     char_u	**sp;
4923     linenr_T	first_lnum;
4924 {
4925     char_u	*s;
4926     linenr_T	lnum = first_lnum;
4927     int		retval = FALSE;
4928 
4929     if (sp == NULL)
4930 	s = ml_get(lnum);
4931     else
4932 	s = *sp;
4933 
4934     while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
4935     {
4936 	if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
4937 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4938 	else
4939 	    ++s;
4940     }
4941     if (*s != '(')
4942 	return FALSE;		/* ';', ' or "  before any () or no '(' */
4943 
4944     while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
4945     {
4946 	if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
4947 	{
4948 	    /* ')' at the end: may have found a match
4949 	     * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash:
4950 	     *       #if defined(x) && \
4951 	     *		 defined(y)
4952 	     */
4953 	    lnum = first_lnum - 1;
4954 	    s = ml_get(lnum);
4955 	    if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\')
4956 		retval = TRUE;
4957 	    goto done;
4958 	}
4959 	if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
4960 	{
4961 	    /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */
4962 	    if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
4963 		break;
4964 
4965 	    s = ml_get(++lnum);
4966 	}
4967 	else if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
4968 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4969 	else
4970 	    ++s;
4971     }
4972 
4973 done:
4974     if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL)
4975 	*sp = ml_get(first_lnum);
4976 
4977     return retval;
4978 }
4979 
4980     static int
4981 cin_isif(p)
4982     char_u  *p;
4983 {
4984     return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
4985 }
4986 
4987     static int
4988 cin_iselse(p)
4989     char_u  *p;
4990 {
4991     if (*p == '}')	    /* accept "} else" */
4992 	p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
4993     return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4]));
4994 }
4995 
4996     static int
4997 cin_isdo(p)
4998     char_u  *p;
4999 {
5000     return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5001 }
5002 
5003 /*
5004  * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do".
5005  * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the
5006  * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines.
5007  */
5008     static int
5009 cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen)	    /* XXX */
5010     char_u	*p;
5011     linenr_T	lnum;
5012     int		ind_maxparen;
5013 {
5014     pos_T	cursor_save;
5015     pos_T	*trypos;
5016     int		retval = FALSE;
5017 
5018     p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5019     if (*p == '}')		/* accept "} while (cond);" */
5020 	p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5021     if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]))
5022     {
5023 	cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5024 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5025 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5026 	p = ml_get_curline();
5027 	while (*p && *p != 'w')	/* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */
5028 	{
5029 	    ++p;
5030 	    ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
5031 	}
5032 	if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL
5033 		&& *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';')
5034 	    retval = TRUE;
5035 	curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5036     }
5037     return retval;
5038 }
5039 
5040     static int
5041 cin_isbreak(p)
5042     char_u  *p;
5043 {
5044     return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]));
5045 }
5046 
5047 /* Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or
5048  * constructor-initialization. eg:
5049  *
5050  * class MyClass :
5051  *	baseClass		<-- here
5052  * class MyClass : public baseClass,
5053  *	anotherBaseClass	<-- here (should probably lineup ??)
5054  * MyClass::MyClass(...) :
5055  *	baseClass(...)		<-- here (constructor-initialization)
5056  */
5057     static int
5058 cin_is_cpp_baseclass(line, col)
5059     char_u	*line;
5060     colnr_T	*col;
5061 {
5062     char_u	*s;
5063     int		class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class;
5064 
5065     *col = 0;
5066 
5067     s = cin_skipcomment(line);
5068     if (*s == NUL)
5069 	return FALSE;
5070 
5071     cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5072 
5073     while(*s != NUL)
5074     {
5075 	if (s[0] == ':')
5076 	{
5077 	    if (s[1] == ':')
5078 	    {
5079 		/* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor
5080 		 * initialization any more */
5081 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5082 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2);
5083 	    }
5084 	    else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct)
5085 	    {
5086 		/* we have something found, that looks like the start of
5087 		 * cpp-base-class-declaration or contructor-initialization */
5088 		cpp_base_class = TRUE;
5089 		lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5090 		*col = 0;
5091 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5092 	    }
5093 	    else
5094 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5095 	}
5096 	else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
5097 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6])))
5098 	{
5099 	    class_or_struct = TRUE;
5100 	    lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5101 
5102 	    if (*s == 'c')
5103 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5);
5104 	    else
5105 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6);
5106 	}
5107 	else
5108 	{
5109 	    if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';')
5110 	    {
5111 		cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5112 	    }
5113 	    else if (s[0] == ')')
5114 	    {
5115 		/* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across
5116 		 * something like "):" */
5117 		class_or_struct = FALSE;
5118 		lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE;
5119 	    }
5120 	    else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0]))
5121 	    {
5122 		/* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */
5123 		class_or_struct = FALSE;
5124 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5125 	    }
5126 	    else if (*col == 0)
5127 	    {
5128 		/* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */
5129 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5130 
5131 		/* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */
5132 		if (cpp_base_class && *col == 0)
5133 		    *col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5134 	    }
5135 
5136 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5137 	}
5138     }
5139 
5140     return cpp_base_class;
5141 }
5142 
5143 /*
5144  * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by
5145  * white space and comments.  Skip strings and comments.
5146  * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL.
5147  */
5148     static int
5149 cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore)
5150     char_u	*s;
5151     char_u	*find;
5152     char_u	*ignore;
5153 {
5154     char_u	*p = s;
5155     char_u	*r;
5156     int		len = (int)STRLEN(find);
5157 
5158     while (*p != NUL)
5159     {
5160 	p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5161 	if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0)
5162 	{
5163 	    r = skipwhite(p + len);
5164 	    if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0)
5165 		r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore));
5166 	    if (cin_nocode(r))
5167 		return TRUE;
5168 	}
5169 	if (*p != NUL)
5170 	    ++p;
5171     }
5172     return FALSE;
5173 }
5174 
5175 /*
5176  * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos".
5177  * Return the column found.
5178  */
5179     static int
5180 cin_skip2pos(trypos)
5181     pos_T	*trypos;
5182 {
5183     char_u	*line;
5184     char_u	*p;
5185 
5186     p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
5187     while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col)
5188     {
5189 	if (cin_iscomment(p))
5190 	    p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5191 	else
5192 	{
5193 	    p = skip_string(p);
5194 	    ++p;
5195 	}
5196     }
5197     return (int)(p - line);
5198 }
5199 
5200 /*
5201  * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in.
5202  * Return NULL if no match found.
5203  * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines
5204  * work. */
5205 /* foo()    */
5206 /* {	    */
5207 /* }	    */
5208 
5209     static pos_T *
5210 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
5211     int		ind_maxcomment;
5212 {
5213     pos_T	cursor_save;
5214     pos_T	*trypos;
5215     pos_T	*pos;
5216     static pos_T	pos_copy;
5217 
5218     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5219     while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL)
5220     {
5221 	pos_copy = *trypos;	/* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */
5222 	trypos = &pos_copy;
5223 	curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5224 	pos = NULL;
5225 	/* ignore the { if it's in a // comment */
5226 	if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col
5227 		&& (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */
5228 	    break;
5229 	if (pos != NULL)
5230 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
5231     }
5232     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5233     return trypos;
5234 }
5235 
5236 /*
5237  * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment.
5238  * Return NULL of no match found.
5239  */
5240     static pos_T *
5241 find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
5242     int		ind_maxparen;
5243     int		ind_maxcomment;
5244 {
5245     pos_T	cursor_save;
5246     pos_T	*trypos;
5247     static pos_T	pos_copy;
5248 
5249     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5250     if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL)
5251     {
5252 	/* check if the ( is in a // comment */
5253 	if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col)
5254 	    trypos = NULL;
5255 	else
5256 	{
5257 	    pos_copy = *trypos;	    /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */
5258 	    trypos = &pos_copy;
5259 	    curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5260 	    if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */
5261 		trypos = NULL;
5262 	}
5263     }
5264     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5265     return trypos;
5266 }
5267 
5268 /*
5269  * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the
5270  * cursor position and "startpos".  This makes sure that searching for a
5271  * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of
5272  * looking a few lines further.
5273  */
5274     static int
5275 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos)
5276     int		ind_maxparen;
5277     pos_T	*startpos;
5278 {
5279     long	n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5280 
5281     if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2)
5282 	return ind_maxparen - (int)n;
5283     return ind_maxparen;
5284 }
5285 
5286 /*
5287  * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in
5288  * line "l".
5289  */
5290     static int
5291 find_last_paren(l, start, end)
5292     char_u	*l;
5293     int		start, end;
5294 {
5295     int		i;
5296     int		retval = FALSE;
5297     int		open_count = 0;
5298 
5299     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;		    /* default is start of line */
5300 
5301     for (i = 0; l[i]; i++)
5302     {
5303 	i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */
5304 	i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l);    /* ignore parens in quotes */
5305 	if (l[i] == start)
5306 	    ++open_count;
5307 	else if (l[i] == end)
5308 	{
5309 	    if (open_count > 0)
5310 		--open_count;
5311 	    else
5312 	    {
5313 		curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
5314 		retval = TRUE;
5315 	    }
5316 	}
5317     }
5318     return retval;
5319 }
5320 
5321     int
5322 get_c_indent()
5323 {
5324     /*
5325      * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that
5326      * block should be
5327      */
5328     int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5329 
5330     /*
5331      * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a
5332      * line is imagined to be.
5333      */
5334     int ind_open_imag = 0;
5335 
5336     /*
5337      * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by
5338      * an opening brace.
5339      */
5340     int ind_no_brace = 0;
5341 
5342     /*
5343      * column where the first { of a function should be located }
5344      */
5345     int ind_first_open = 0;
5346 
5347     /*
5348      * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be
5349      * located
5350      */
5351     int ind_open_extra = 0;
5352 
5353     /*
5354      * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left
5355      * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close
5356      * brace should be located
5357      */
5358     int ind_close_extra = 0;
5359 
5360     /*
5361      * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost
5362      * column is imagined to be
5363      */
5364     int ind_open_left_imag = 0;
5365 
5366     /*
5367      * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located
5368      */
5369     int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5370 
5371     /*
5372      * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located
5373      */
5374     int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5375 
5376     /*
5377      * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label
5378      */
5379     int ind_case_break = 0;
5380 
5381     /*
5382      * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label
5383      * should be located
5384      */
5385     int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5386 
5387     /*
5388      * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located
5389      */
5390     int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5391 
5392     /*
5393      * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented
5394      */
5395     int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5396 
5397     /*
5398      * amount a function type spec should be indented
5399      */
5400     int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5401 
5402     /*
5403      * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization
5404      * should be indented
5405      */
5406     int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5407 
5408     /*
5409      * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line
5410      * should be located
5411      */
5412     int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5413 
5414     /*
5415      * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses
5416      */
5417     int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2;
5418 
5419     /*
5420      * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which
5421      * itself is also unclosed
5422      */
5423     int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5424 
5425     /*
5426      * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an
5427      * unclosed parentheses.
5428      */
5429     int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0;
5430 
5431     /*
5432      * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and
5433      * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer
5434      * context (for very long lines).
5435      */
5436     int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0;
5437 
5438     /*
5439      * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after
5440      * an unclosed parentheses.
5441      */
5442     int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0;
5443 
5444     /*
5445      * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching
5446      * opening parentheses.
5447      */
5448     int ind_matching_paren = 0;
5449 
5450     /*
5451      * Extra indent for comments.
5452      */
5453     int ind_comment = 0;
5454 
5455     /*
5456      * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it.
5457      */
5458     int ind_in_comment = 3;
5459 
5460     /*
5461      * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something
5462      * after the comment opener.
5463      */
5464     int ind_in_comment2 = 0;
5465 
5466     /*
5467      * max lines to search for an open paren
5468      */
5469     int ind_maxparen = 20;
5470 
5471     /*
5472      * max lines to search for an open comment
5473      */
5474     int ind_maxcomment = 70;
5475 
5476     /*
5477      * handle braces for java code
5478      */
5479     int	ind_java = 0;
5480 
5481     /*
5482      * handle blocked cases correctly
5483      */
5484     int ind_keep_case_label = 0;
5485 
5486     pos_T	cur_curpos;
5487     int		amount;
5488     int		scope_amount;
5489     int		cur_amount;
5490     colnr_T	col;
5491     char_u	*theline;
5492     char_u	*linecopy;
5493     pos_T	*trypos;
5494     pos_T	*tryposBrace = NULL;
5495     pos_T	our_paren_pos;
5496     char_u	*start;
5497     int		start_brace;
5498 #define BRACE_IN_COL0		1	    /* '{' is in comumn 0 */
5499 #define BRACE_AT_START		2	    /* '{' is at start of line */
5500 #define BRACE_AT_END		3	    /* '{' is at end of line */
5501     linenr_T	ourscope;
5502     char_u	*l;
5503     char_u	*look;
5504     char_u	terminated;
5505     int		lookfor;
5506 #define LOOKFOR_INITIAL		0
5507 #define LOOKFOR_IF		1
5508 #define LOOKFOR_DO		2
5509 #define LOOKFOR_CASE		3
5510 #define LOOKFOR_ANY		4
5511 #define LOOKFOR_TERM		5
5512 #define LOOKFOR_UNTERM		6
5513 #define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL	7
5514 #define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK		8
5515 #define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS	9
5516 #define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT	10
5517 
5518     int		whilelevel;
5519     linenr_T	lnum;
5520     char_u	*options;
5521     int		fraction = 0;	    /* init for GCC */
5522     int		divider;
5523     int		n;
5524     int		iscase;
5525     int		lookfor_break;
5526     int		cont_amount = 0;    /* amount for continuation line */
5527 
5528     for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; )
5529     {
5530 	l = options++;
5531 	if (*options == '-')
5532 	    ++options;
5533 	n = getdigits(&options);
5534 	divider = 0;
5535 	if (*options == '.')	    /* ".5s" means a fraction */
5536 	{
5537 	    fraction = atol((char *)++options);
5538 	    while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options))
5539 	    {
5540 		++options;
5541 		if (divider)
5542 		    divider *= 10;
5543 		else
5544 		    divider = 10;
5545 	    }
5546 	}
5547 	if (*options == 's')	    /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */
5548 	{
5549 	    if (n == 0 && fraction == 0)
5550 		n = curbuf->b_p_sw;	/* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */
5551 	    else
5552 	    {
5553 		n *= curbuf->b_p_sw;
5554 		if (divider)
5555 		    n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider;
5556 	    }
5557 	    ++options;
5558 	}
5559 	if (l[1] == '-')
5560 	    n = -n;
5561 	/* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in
5562 	 * change.txt, and add explanation for it! */
5563 	switch (*l)
5564 	{
5565 	    case '>': ind_level = n; break;
5566 	    case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break;
5567 	    case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break;
5568 	    case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break;
5569 	    case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break;
5570 	    case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break;
5571 	    case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break;
5572 	    case ':': ind_case = n; break;
5573 	    case '=': ind_case_code = n; break;
5574 	    case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break;
5575 	    case 'p': ind_param = n; break;
5576 	    case 't': ind_func_type = n; break;
5577 	    case '/': ind_comment = n; break;
5578 	    case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break;
5579 	    case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break;
5580 	    case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break;
5581 	    case '+': ind_continuation = n; break;
5582 	    case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break;
5583 	    case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break;
5584 	    case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break;
5585 	    case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break;
5586 	    case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break;
5587 	    case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break;
5588 	    case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break;
5589 	    case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break;
5590 	    case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break;
5591 	    case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break;
5592 	    case 'j': ind_java = n; break;
5593 	    case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break;
5594 	}
5595     }
5596 
5597     /* remember where the cursor was when we started */
5598     cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor;
5599 
5600     /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line.
5601      * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with
5602      * ml_get is valid! */
5603     linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum));
5604     if (linecopy == NULL)
5605 	return 0;
5606 
5607     /*
5608      * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the
5609      * cursor position.  We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when
5610      * inserting new stuff.
5611      * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus
5612      * check for that.
5613      */
5614     if ((State & INSERT)
5615 	    && curwin->w_cursor.col < STRLEN(linecopy)
5616 	    && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')')
5617 	linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
5618 
5619     theline = skipwhite(linecopy);
5620 
5621     /* move the cursor to the start of the line */
5622 
5623     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5624 
5625     /*
5626      * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'.
5627      */
5628     if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE)))
5629     {
5630 	amount = 0;
5631     }
5632 
5633     /*
5634      * Is it a non-case label?	Then that goes at the left margin too.
5635      */
5636     else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))	    /* XXX */
5637     {
5638 	amount = 0;
5639     }
5640 
5641     /*
5642      * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a
5643      * previous line, lineup with that one.
5644      */
5645     else if (cin_islinecomment(theline)
5646 	    && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */
5647     {
5648 	/* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5649 	getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5650 	amount = col;
5651     }
5652 
5653     /*
5654      * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the
5655      * comment, try using the 'comments' option.
5656      */
5657     else if (!cin_iscomment(theline)
5658 	    && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
5659     {
5660 	int	lead_start_len = 2;
5661 	int	lead_middle_len = 1;
5662 	char_u	lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* start-comment string */
5663 	char_u	lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* middle-comment string */
5664 	char_u	lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN];		/* end-comment string */
5665 	char_u	*p;
5666 	int	start_align = 0;
5667 	int	start_off = 0;
5668 	int	done = FALSE;
5669 
5670 	/* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5671 	getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5672 	amount = col;
5673 
5674 	p = curbuf->b_p_com;
5675 	while (*p != NUL)
5676 	{
5677 	    int	align = 0;
5678 	    int	off = 0;
5679 	    int what = 0;
5680 
5681 	    while (*p != NUL && *p != ':')
5682 	    {
5683 		if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
5684 		    what = *p++;
5685 		else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT)
5686 		    align = *p++;
5687 		else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
5688 		    off = getdigits(&p);
5689 		else
5690 		    ++p;
5691 	    }
5692 
5693 	    if (*p == ':')
5694 		++p;
5695 	    (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
5696 	    if (what == COM_START)
5697 	    {
5698 		STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end);
5699 		lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start);
5700 		start_off = off;
5701 		start_align = align;
5702 	    }
5703 	    else if (what == COM_MIDDLE)
5704 	    {
5705 		STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end);
5706 		lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
5707 	    }
5708 	    else if (what == COM_END)
5709 	    {
5710 		/* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it
5711 		 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */
5712 		if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0
5713 			&& STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0)
5714 		{
5715 		    done = TRUE;
5716 		    if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
5717 		    {
5718 			/* If the start comment string matches in the previous
5719 			 * line, use the indent of that line pluss offset.  If
5720 			 * the middle comment string matches in the previous
5721 			 * line, use the indent of that line.  XXX */
5722 			look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1));
5723 			if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0)
5724 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
5725 			else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle,
5726 							lead_middle_len) == 0)
5727 			{
5728 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
5729 			    break;
5730 			}
5731 			/* If the start comment string doesn't match with the
5732 			 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */
5733 			else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col,
5734 					     lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0)
5735 			    continue;
5736 		    }
5737 		    if (start_off != 0)
5738 			amount += start_off;
5739 		    else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT)
5740 			amount += lead_start_len - lead_middle_len;
5741 		    break;
5742 		}
5743 
5744 		/* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up
5745 		 * with the middle comment */
5746 		if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0
5747 			&& STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0)
5748 		{
5749 		    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
5750 								     /* XXX */
5751 		    if (off != 0)
5752 			amount += off;
5753 		    else if (align == COM_RIGHT)
5754 			amount += lead_start_len - lead_middle_len;
5755 		    done = TRUE;
5756 		    break;
5757 		}
5758 	    }
5759 	}
5760 
5761 	/* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the
5762 	 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up
5763 	 * with the first character of the comment text.
5764 	 */
5765 	if (done)
5766 	    ;
5767 	else if (theline[0] == '*')
5768 	    amount += 1;
5769 	else
5770 	{
5771 	    /*
5772 	     * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take
5773 	     * the indent of the previous non-empty line.  If 'cino' has "CO"
5774 	     * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any
5775 	     * white characters after it line up with the text after it;
5776 	     * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino'
5777 	     */
5778 	    amount = -1;
5779 	    for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum)
5780 	    {
5781 		if (linewhite(lnum))		    /* skip blank lines */
5782 		    continue;
5783 		amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum);	    /* XXX */
5784 		break;
5785 	    }
5786 	    if (amount == -1)			    /* use the comment opener */
5787 	    {
5788 		if (!ind_in_comment2)
5789 		{
5790 		    start = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
5791 		    look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */
5792 		    if (*look != NUL)		    /* if something after it */
5793 			trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start);
5794 		}
5795 		getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5796 		amount = col;
5797 		if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL)
5798 		    amount += ind_in_comment;
5799 	    }
5800 	}
5801     }
5802 
5803     /*
5804      * Are we inside parentheses or braces?
5805      */						    /* XXX */
5806     else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
5807 		&& ind_java == 0)
5808 	    || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
5809 	    || trypos != NULL)
5810     {
5811       if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL)
5812       {
5813 	  /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found.  Use the one which is
5814 	   * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */
5815 	  if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum
5816 		  ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum
5817 		  : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col)
5818 	      trypos = NULL;
5819 	  else
5820 	      tryposBrace = NULL;
5821       }
5822 
5823       if (trypos != NULL)
5824       {
5825 	/*
5826 	 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of
5827 	 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren.
5828 	 */
5829 	amount = -1;
5830 	cur_amount = MAXCOL;
5831 	our_paren_pos = *trypos;
5832 	for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum)
5833 	{
5834 	    l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum));
5835 	    if (cin_nocode(l))		/* skip comment lines */
5836 		continue;
5837 	    if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum))	/* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
5838 		continue;
5839 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5840 
5841 	    /* Skip a comment. XXX */
5842 	    if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
5843 	    {
5844 		lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
5845 		continue;
5846 	    }
5847 
5848 	    /* XXX */
5849 	    if ((trypos = find_match_paren(
5850 			    corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
5851 						      ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
5852 		    && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
5853 		    && trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col)
5854 	    {
5855 		    amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum);	/* XXX */
5856 
5857 		    if (theline[0] == ')')
5858 		    {
5859 			if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum && cur_amount > amount)
5860 			    cur_amount = amount;
5861 			amount = -1;
5862 		    }
5863 		break;
5864 	    }
5865 	}
5866 
5867 	/*
5868 	 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX
5869 	 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed
5870 	 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses.
5871 	 */
5872 	if (amount == -1)
5873 	{
5874 	    amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment);
5875 	    if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0
5876 		       || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
5877 	    {
5878 		/*
5879 		 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there;
5880 		 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character.
5881 		 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is
5882 		 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the
5883 		 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next
5884 		 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long
5885 		 * lines).
5886 		 */
5887 		if (theline[0] != ')')
5888 		{
5889 		    cur_amount = MAXCOL;
5890 		    l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum);
5891 		    if (ind_unclosed_wrapped
5892 				       && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL))
5893 		    {
5894 			/* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level
5895 			 * for each additional level */
5896 			n = 1;
5897 			for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col)
5898 			{
5899 			    switch (l[col])
5900 			    {
5901 				case '(':
5902 				case '{': ++n;
5903 					  break;
5904 
5905 				case ')':
5906 				case '}': if (n > 1)
5907 					      --n;
5908 					  break;
5909 			    }
5910 			}
5911 
5912 			our_paren_pos.col = 0;
5913 			amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped;
5914 		    }
5915 		    else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok)
5916 			our_paren_pos.col++;
5917 		    else
5918 		    {
5919 			col = our_paren_pos.col + 1;
5920 			while (vim_iswhite(l[col]))
5921 			    col++;
5922 			if (l[col] != NUL)	/* In case of trailing space */
5923 			    our_paren_pos.col = col;
5924 			else
5925 			    our_paren_pos.col++;
5926 		    }
5927 		}
5928 
5929 		/*
5930 		 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it
5931 		 * if we did the above "if".
5932 		 */
5933 		if (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
5934 		{
5935 		    getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5936 		    if (cur_amount > (int)col)
5937 			cur_amount = col;
5938 		}
5939 	    }
5940 
5941 	    if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren)
5942 	    {
5943 		/* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
5944 	    }
5945 	    else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore
5946 						  && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
5947 	    {
5948 		if (cur_amount != MAXCOL)
5949 		    amount = cur_amount;
5950 	    }
5951 	    else
5952 	    {
5953 		/* add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one */
5954 		col = our_paren_pos.col;
5955 		while (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
5956 		{
5957 		    --our_paren_pos.col;
5958 		    switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos))
5959 		    {
5960 			case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2;
5961 				  col = our_paren_pos.col;
5962 				  break;
5963 			case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2;
5964 				  col = MAXCOL;
5965 				  break;
5966 		    }
5967 		}
5968 
5969 		/* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside
5970 		 * braces */
5971 		if (col == MAXCOL)
5972 		    amount += ind_unclosed;
5973 		else
5974 		{
5975 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
5976 		    curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
5977 		    if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
5978 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
5979 			amount += ind_unclosed2;
5980 		    else
5981 			amount += ind_unclosed;
5982 		}
5983 		/*
5984 		 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two
5985 		 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous
5986 		 * lines:
5987 		 *  func_long_name(		    if (x
5988 		 *	arg				    && yy
5989 		 *	)	  ^ not here	       )    ^ not here
5990 		 */
5991 		if (cur_amount < amount)
5992 		    amount = cur_amount;
5993 	    }
5994 	}
5995 
5996 	/* add extra indent for a comment */
5997 	if (cin_iscomment(theline))
5998 	    amount += ind_comment;
5999       }
6000 
6001       /*
6002        * Are we at least inside braces, then?
6003        */
6004       else
6005       {
6006 	trypos = tryposBrace;
6007 
6008 	ourscope = trypos->lnum;
6009 	start = ml_get(ourscope);
6010 
6011 	/*
6012 	 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general.
6013 	 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that;
6014 	 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as
6015 	 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that.
6016 	 */
6017 	look = skipwhite(start);
6018 	if (*look == '{')
6019 	{
6020 	    getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6021 	    amount = col;
6022 	    if (*start == '{')
6023 		start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0;
6024 	    else
6025 		start_brace = BRACE_AT_START;
6026 	}
6027 	else
6028 	{
6029 	    /*
6030 	     * that opening brace might have been on a continuation
6031 	     * line.  if so, find the start of the line.
6032 	     */
6033 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope;
6034 
6035 	    /*
6036 	     * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6037 	     * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6038 	     */
6039 	    lnum = ourscope;
6040 	    if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')')
6041 		    && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6042 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6043 		lnum = trypos->lnum;
6044 
6045 	    /*
6046 	     * It could have been something like
6047 	     *	   case 1: if (asdf &&
6048 	     *			ldfd) {
6049 	     *		    }
6050 	     */
6051 	    if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
6052 		amount = get_indent();
6053 	    else
6054 		amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment);
6055 
6056 	    start_brace = BRACE_AT_END;
6057 	}
6058 
6059 	/*
6060 	 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where
6061 	 * we want to be.  otherwise, add the amount of room
6062 	 * that an indent is supposed to be.
6063 	 */
6064 	if (theline[0] == '}')
6065 	{
6066 	    /*
6067 	     * they may want closing braces to line up with something
6068 	     * other than the open brace.  indulge them, if so.
6069 	     */
6070 	    amount += ind_close_extra;
6071 	}
6072 	else
6073 	{
6074 	    /*
6075 	     * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if"
6076 	     * to match it with.
6077 	     * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do"
6078 	     * to match it with.
6079 	     */
6080 	    lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6081 	    if (cin_iselse(theline))
6082 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF;
6083 	    else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen))
6084 								    /* XXX */
6085 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO;
6086 	    if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL)
6087 	    {
6088 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum;
6089 		if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen,
6090 							ind_maxcomment) == OK)
6091 		{
6092 		    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
6093 		    goto theend;
6094 		}
6095 	    }
6096 
6097 	    /*
6098 	     * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or
6099 	     * failed to find a matching "if").
6100 	     * Search backwards for something to line up with.
6101 	     * First set amount for when we don't find anything.
6102 	     */
6103 
6104 	    /*
6105 	     * if the '{' is  _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary
6106 	     * location of a left-margin brace.  Otherwise, correct the
6107 	     * location for ind_open_extra.
6108 	     */
6109 
6110 	    if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0)	    /* '{' is in column 0 */
6111 	    {
6112 		amount = ind_open_left_imag;
6113 	    }
6114 	    else
6115 	    {
6116 		if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END)    /* '{' is at end of line */
6117 		    amount += ind_open_imag;
6118 		else
6119 		{
6120 		    /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */
6121 		    amount -= ind_open_extra;
6122 		    if (amount < 0)
6123 			amount = 0;
6124 		}
6125 	    }
6126 
6127 	    lookfor_break = FALSE;
6128 
6129 	    if (cin_iscase(theline))	/* it's a switch() label */
6130 	    {
6131 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE;	/* find a previous switch() label */
6132 		amount += ind_case;
6133 	    }
6134 	    else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline))	/* private:, ... */
6135 	    {
6136 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL;	/* class decl is this block */
6137 		amount += ind_scopedecl;
6138 	    }
6139 	    else
6140 	    {
6141 		if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline))	/* break; ... */
6142 		    lookfor_break = TRUE;
6143 
6144 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6145 		amount += ind_level;	/* ind_level from start of block */
6146 	    }
6147 	    scope_amount = amount;
6148 	    whilelevel = 0;
6149 
6150 	    /*
6151 	     * Search backwards.  If we find something we recognize, line up
6152 	     * with that.
6153 	     *
6154 	     * if we're looking at an open brace, indent
6155 	     * the usual amount relative to the conditional
6156 	     * that opens the block.
6157 	     */
6158 	    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
6159 	    for (;;)
6160 	    {
6161 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
6162 		curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6163 
6164 		/*
6165 		 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line
6166 		 * up with it.
6167 		 */
6168 		if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope)
6169 		{
6170 		    /* we reached end of scope:
6171 		     * if looking for a enum or structure initialization
6172 		     * go further back:
6173 		     * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then
6174 		     * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable
6175 		     * declaration:
6176 		     * int x,
6177 		     *     here; <-- add ind_continuation
6178 		     */
6179 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6180 		    {
6181 			if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0
6182 				|| curwin->w_cursor.lnum
6183 						    < ourscope - ind_maxparen)
6184 			{
6185 			    /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit)
6186 			     * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable
6187 			     * initialization) */
6188 			    if (cont_amount > 0)
6189 				amount = cont_amount;
6190 			    else
6191 				amount += ind_continuation;
6192 			    break;
6193 			}
6194 
6195 			l = ml_get_curline();
6196 
6197 			/*
6198 			 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the
6199 			 * comment.
6200 			 */
6201 			trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment);
6202 			if (trypos != NULL)
6203 			{
6204 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6205 			    continue;
6206 			}
6207 
6208 			/*
6209 			 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
6210 			 */
6211 			if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6212 			    continue;
6213 
6214 			if (cin_nocode(l))
6215 			    continue;
6216 
6217 			terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6218 
6219 			/*
6220 			 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a
6221 			 * function declaration, we are done
6222 			 * (it's a variable declaration).
6223 			 */
6224 			if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0
6225 				|| !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6226 			{
6227 			    /* if the line is terminated with another ','
6228 			     * it is a continued variable initialization.
6229 			     * don't add extra indent.
6230 			     * TODO: does not work, if  a function
6231 			     * declaration is split over multiple lines:
6232 			     * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then.
6233 			     */
6234 			    if (terminated == ',')
6235 				break;
6236 
6237 			    /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment,
6238 			     * we are done.
6239 			     */
6240 			    if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit())
6241 				break;
6242 
6243 			    /* nothing useful found */
6244 			    if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{')
6245 				continue;
6246 			}
6247 
6248 			if (terminated != ';')
6249 			{
6250 			    /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor
6251 			     * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it
6252 			     * will take us back to the start of the line.
6253 			     */					/* XXX */
6254 			    trypos = NULL;
6255 			    if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'))
6256 				trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6257 					ind_maxcomment);
6258 
6259 			    if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6260 				trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6261 
6262 			    if (trypos != NULL)
6263 			    {
6264 				curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6265 				continue;
6266 			    }
6267 			}
6268 
6269 			/* it's a variable declaration, add indentation
6270 			 * like in
6271 			 * int a,
6272 			 *    b;
6273 			 */
6274 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6275 			    amount = cont_amount;
6276 			else
6277 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6278 		    }
6279 		    else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6280 		    {
6281 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6282 			    amount = cont_amount;
6283 			else
6284 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6285 		    }
6286 		    else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6287 					  && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6288 		    {
6289 			amount = scope_amount;
6290 			if (theline[0] == '{')
6291 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6292 		    }
6293 		    break;
6294 		}
6295 
6296 		/*
6297 		 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
6298 		 */					    /* XXX */
6299 		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6300 		{
6301 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6302 		    continue;
6303 		}
6304 
6305 		l = ml_get_curline();
6306 
6307 		/*
6308 		 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that.
6309 		 * if this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same.
6310 		 */
6311 		iscase = cin_iscase(l);
6312 		if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6313 		{
6314 		    /* we are only looking for cpp base class
6315 		     * declaration/initialization any longer */
6316 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6317 			break;
6318 
6319 		    /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in
6320 		     * labels. */
6321 		    if (whilelevel > 0)
6322 			continue;
6323 
6324 		    /*
6325 		     *	case xx:
6326 		     *	    c = 99 +	    <- this indent plus continuation
6327 		     *->	   here;
6328 		     */
6329 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6330 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6331 		    {
6332 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6333 			    amount = cont_amount;
6334 			else
6335 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6336 			break;
6337 		    }
6338 
6339 		    /*
6340 		     *	case xx:	<- line up with this case
6341 		     *	    x = 333;
6342 		     *	case yy:
6343 		     */
6344 		    if (       (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE)
6345 			    || (iscase && lookfor_break)
6346 			    || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL))
6347 		    {
6348 			/*
6349 			 * Check that this case label is not for another
6350 			 * switch()
6351 			 */				    /* XXX */
6352 			if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) ==
6353 					     NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope)
6354 			{
6355 			    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
6356 			    break;
6357 			}
6358 			continue;
6359 		    }
6360 
6361 		    n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum);  /* XXX */
6362 
6363 		    /*
6364 		     *	 case xx: if (cond)	    <- line up with this if
6365 		     *		      y = y + 1;
6366 		     * ->	  s = 99;
6367 		     *
6368 		     *	 case xx:
6369 		     *	     if (cond)		<- line up with this line
6370 		     *		 y = y + 1;
6371 		     * ->    s = 99;
6372 		     */
6373 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
6374 		    {
6375 			if (n)
6376 			    amount = n;
6377 
6378 			if (!lookfor_break)
6379 			    break;
6380 		    }
6381 
6382 		    /*
6383 		     *	 case xx: x = x + 1;	    <- line up with this x
6384 		     * ->	  y = y + 1;
6385 		     *
6386 		     *	 case xx: if (cond)	    <- line up with this if
6387 		     * ->	       y = y + 1;
6388 		     */
6389 		    if (n)
6390 		    {
6391 			amount = n;
6392 			l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6393 			if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l))
6394 			    amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6395 			break;
6396 		    }
6397 
6398 		    /*
6399 		     * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch
6400 		     * label.  If nothing is found, line up relative to the
6401 		     * switch label.
6402 		     *	    break;		<- may line up with this line
6403 		     *	 case xx:
6404 		     * ->   y = 1;
6405 		     */
6406 		    scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase    /* XXX */
6407 					? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code);
6408 		    lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY;
6409 		    continue;
6410 		}
6411 
6412 		/*
6413 		 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration,
6414 		 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks.
6415 		 */
6416 		if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)
6417 		{
6418 		    if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos =
6419 				    find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6420 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6421 		    continue;
6422 		}
6423 
6424 		/*
6425 		 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them.
6426 		 */
6427 		if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
6428 		{
6429 		    l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6430 		    if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l))
6431 			continue;
6432 		}
6433 
6434 		/*
6435 		 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc.
6436 		 * Ignore comment and empty lines.
6437 		 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have
6438 		 * unlocked it)
6439 		 */
6440 		l = ml_get_curline();
6441 		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
6442 							     || cin_nocode(l))
6443 		    continue;
6444 
6445 		/*
6446 		 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
6447 		 * constructor initialization?
6448 		 */						    /* XXX */
6449 		if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass
6450 					     && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
6451 		{
6452 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6453 		    {
6454 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6455 			    amount = cont_amount;
6456 			else
6457 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6458 		    }
6459 		    else if (col == 0 || theline[0] == '{')
6460 		    {
6461 			amount = get_indent();
6462 			if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
6463 				&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6464 					ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6465 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */
6466 			if (theline[0] != '{')
6467 			    amount += ind_cpp_baseclass;
6468 		    }
6469 		    else
6470 		    {
6471 			curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6472 			getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
6473 			amount = (int)col;
6474 		    }
6475 		    break;
6476 		}
6477 		else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6478 		{
6479 		    /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class
6480 		     * declaration or initialization before the opening brace. */
6481 		    if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE))
6482 			break;
6483 		    else
6484 			continue;
6485 		}
6486 
6487 		/*
6488 		 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated.
6489 		 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if
6490 		 * there is anoter unterminated statement behind, eg:
6491 		 *   123,
6492 		 *   sizeof
6493 		 *	  here
6494 		 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure
6495 		 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration
6496 		 * (indented).
6497 		 */
6498 		terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6499 
6500 		if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6501 							&& terminated == ','))
6502 		{
6503 		    /*
6504 		     * if we're in the middle of a paren thing,
6505 		     * go back to the line that starts it so
6506 		     * we can get the right prevailing indent
6507 		     *	   if ( foo &&
6508 		     *		    bar )
6509 		     */
6510 		    /*
6511 		     * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6512 		     * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6513 		     */
6514 		    (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
6515 		    trypos = find_match_paren(
6516 				 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6517 							      ind_maxcomment);
6518 
6519 		    /*
6520 		     * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching
6521 		     * braces.
6522 		     */
6523 		    if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6524 			trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6525 
6526 		    if (trypos != NULL)
6527 		    {
6528 			/*
6529 			 * Check if we are on a case label now.  This is
6530 			 * handled above.
6531 			 *     case xx:  if ( asdf &&
6532 			 *			asdf)
6533 			 */
6534 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
6535 			l = ml_get_curline();
6536 			if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6537 			{
6538 			    ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6539 			    continue;
6540 			}
6541 		    }
6542 
6543 		    /*
6544 		     * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the
6545 		     * indent from
6546 		     * char *usethis = "bla\
6547 		     *		 bla",
6548 		     *      here;
6549 		     */
6550 		    if (terminated == ',')
6551 		    {
6552 			while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6553 			{
6554 			    l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6555 			    if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
6556 				break;
6557 			    --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6558 			}
6559 		    }
6560 
6561 		    /*
6562 		     * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
6563 		     * ignoring any jump label.	    XXX
6564 		     */
6565 		    cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
6566 							  &l, ind_maxcomment);
6567 
6568 		    /*
6569 		     * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it
6570 		     * starts with a '{', line it up with this line.
6571 		     *		while (not)
6572 		     * ->	{
6573 		     *		}
6574 		     */
6575 		    if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6576 							 && theline[0] == '{')
6577 		    {
6578 			amount = cur_amount;
6579 			/*
6580 			 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line
6581 			 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match
6582 			 * in the same line (scope is the same).  Probably:
6583 			 *	{ 1, 2 },
6584 			 * ->	{ 3, 4 }
6585 			 */
6586 			if (*skipwhite(l) != '{')
6587 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6588 
6589 			if (ind_cpp_baseclass)
6590 			{
6591 			    /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base
6592 			     * class declaration or initialization */
6593 			    lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
6594 			    continue;
6595 			}
6596 			break;
6597 		    }
6598 
6599 		    /*
6600 		     * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc.
6601 		     * Also allow "   } else".
6602 		     */
6603 		    if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l)))
6604 		    {
6605 			/*
6606 			 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up
6607 			 * with the last one.
6608 			 *   if (cond)
6609 			 *	    100 +
6610 			 * ->		here;
6611 			 */
6612 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6613 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6614 			{
6615 			    if (cont_amount > 0)
6616 				amount = cont_amount;
6617 			    else
6618 				amount += ind_continuation;
6619 			    break;
6620 			}
6621 
6622 			/*
6623 			 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we
6624 			 * are finished.
6625 			 *	    while (not)
6626 			 * ->		here;
6627 			 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line
6628 			 * before this is terminated.
6629 			 *	yyy;
6630 			 *	if (stat)
6631 			 *	    while (not)
6632 			 *		xxx;
6633 			 * ->	here;
6634 			 */
6635 			amount = cur_amount;
6636 			if (theline[0] == '{')
6637 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6638 			if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
6639 			{
6640 			    amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6641 			    break;
6642 			}
6643 
6644 			/*
6645 			 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a
6646 			 * do, line up with the while()
6647 			 *     do
6648 			 *	    x = 1;
6649 			 * ->  here
6650 			 */
6651 			l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline());
6652 			if (cin_isdo(l))
6653 			{
6654 			    if (whilelevel == 0)
6655 				break;
6656 			    --whilelevel;
6657 			}
6658 
6659 			/*
6660 			 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the
6661 			 * one between the "if" and the "else".
6662 			 * Need to use the scope of this "else".  XXX
6663 			 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
6664 			 */
6665 			if (cin_iselse(l)
6666 				&& whilelevel == 0
6667 				&& ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
6668 								    == NULL
6669 				    || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
6670 					ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL))
6671 			    break;
6672 		    }
6673 
6674 		    /*
6675 		     * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an
6676 		     * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or
6677 		     * add someting for a continuation line, depending on
6678 		     * the line before this one.
6679 		     */
6680 		    else
6681 		    {
6682 			/*
6683 			 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with
6684 			 * the last one.
6685 			 *   c = 99 +
6686 			 *	    100 +
6687 			 * ->	    here;
6688 			 */
6689 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6690 			{
6691 			    /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */
6692 			    if (terminated == ',')
6693 				amount += ind_continuation;
6694 			    break;
6695 			}
6696 
6697 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6698 			{
6699 			    /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the
6700 			     * lowest one, but check for cpp base class
6701 			     * declaration/initialization, if it is an
6702 			     * opening brace or we are looking just for
6703 			     * enumerations/initializations. */
6704 			    if (terminated == ',')
6705 			    {
6706 				if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0)
6707 				    break;
6708 
6709 				lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
6710 				continue;
6711 			    }
6712 
6713 			    /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but
6714 			     * reduce indent. */
6715 			    if (amount > cur_amount)
6716 				amount = cur_amount;
6717 			}
6718 			else
6719 			{
6720 			    /*
6721 			     * Found first unterminated line on a row, may
6722 			     * line up with this line, remember its indent
6723 			     *	    100 +
6724 			     * ->	    here;
6725 			     */
6726 			    amount = cur_amount;
6727 
6728 			    /*
6729 			     * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we
6730 			     * are in an initialization or enum
6731 			     * struct xxx =
6732 			     * {
6733 			     *      sizeof a,
6734 			     *      124 };
6735 			     * or a normal possible continuation line.
6736 			     * but only, of no other statement has been found
6737 			     * yet.
6738 			     */
6739 			    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',')
6740 			    {
6741 				lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT;
6742 				cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount();
6743 			    }
6744 			    else
6745 			    {
6746 				if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL
6747 					&& *l != NUL
6748 					&& l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
6749 								/* XXX */
6750 				    cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(
6751 						       curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
6752 				if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
6753 				    lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
6754 			    }
6755 			}
6756 		    }
6757 		}
6758 
6759 		/*
6760 		 * Check if we are after a while (cond);
6761 		 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do".
6762 		 */
6763 							/* XXX */
6764 		else if (cin_iswhileofdo(l,
6765 					 curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
6766 		{
6767 		    /*
6768 		     * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up
6769 		     * with the last one.
6770 		     *	    while (cond);
6771 		     *	    100 +		<- line up with this one
6772 		     * ->	    here;
6773 		     */
6774 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6775 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6776 		    {
6777 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6778 			    amount = cont_amount;
6779 			else
6780 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6781 			break;
6782 		    }
6783 
6784 		    if (whilelevel == 0)
6785 		    {
6786 			lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM;
6787 			amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
6788 			if (theline[0] == '{')
6789 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6790 		    }
6791 		    ++whilelevel;
6792 		}
6793 
6794 		/*
6795 		 * We are after a "normal" statement.
6796 		 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the
6797 		 * indent of that other statement.
6798 		 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used,
6799 		 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement.
6800 		 */
6801 		else
6802 		{
6803 		    /*
6804 		     * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It
6805 		     * may be lined up with the case label.
6806 		     */
6807 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK
6808 				  && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
6809 		    {
6810 			lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY;
6811 			continue;
6812 		    }
6813 
6814 		    /*
6815 		     * Handle "do {" line.
6816 		     */
6817 		    if (whilelevel > 0)
6818 		    {
6819 			l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
6820 			if (cin_isdo(l))
6821 			{
6822 			    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
6823 			    --whilelevel;
6824 			    continue;
6825 			}
6826 		    }
6827 
6828 		    /*
6829 		     * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add
6830 		     * the amount for a continuation line.
6831 		     *	 x = 1;
6832 		     *	 y = foo +
6833 		     * ->	here;
6834 		     * or
6835 		     *	 int x = 1;
6836 		     *	 int foo,
6837 		     * ->	here;
6838 		     */
6839 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6840 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6841 		    {
6842 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6843 			    amount = cont_amount;
6844 			else
6845 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6846 			break;
6847 		    }
6848 
6849 		    /*
6850 		     * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if"
6851 		     * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us.
6852 		     *	 x = 1;				x = 1;
6853 		     *	 if (asdf)		    y = 2;
6854 		     *	     while (asdf)	  ->here;
6855 		     *		here;
6856 		     * ->foo;
6857 		     */
6858 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
6859 		    {
6860 			if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0)
6861 			    break;
6862 		    }
6863 
6864 		    /*
6865 		     * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated.
6866 		     * To know what needs to be done look further backward for
6867 		     * a terminated line.
6868 		     */
6869 		    else
6870 		    {
6871 			/*
6872 			 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so
6873 			 * that matching it will take us back to the start of
6874 			 * the line.  Helps for:
6875 			 *     func(asdr,
6876 			 *	      asdfasdf);
6877 			 *     here;
6878 			 */
6879 term_again:
6880 			l = ml_get_curline();
6881 			if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
6882 				&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6883 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6884 			{
6885 			    /*
6886 			     * Check if we are on a case label now.  This is
6887 			     * handled above.
6888 			     *	   case xx:  if ( asdf &&
6889 			     *			    asdf)
6890 			     */
6891 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
6892 			    l = ml_get_curline();
6893 			    if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6894 			    {
6895 				++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6896 				continue;
6897 			    }
6898 			}
6899 
6900 			/* When aligning with the case statement, don't align
6901 			 * with a statement after it.
6902 			 *  case 1: {   <-- don't use this { position
6903 			 *	stat;
6904 			 *  }
6905 			 *  case 2:
6906 			 *	stat;
6907 			 * }
6908 			 */
6909 			iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l));
6910 
6911 			/*
6912 			 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
6913 			 * ignoring any jump label.
6914 			 */
6915 			amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
6916 							  &l, ind_maxcomment);
6917 
6918 			if (theline[0] == '{')
6919 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6920 			/* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */
6921 			if (*skipwhite(l) == '{')
6922 			    amount -= ind_open_extra;
6923 			lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM;
6924 
6925 			/*
6926 			 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of
6927 			 * that block.
6928 			 */
6929 			curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6930 			if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}'
6931 				&& (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
6932 							    != NULL) /* XXX */
6933 			{
6934 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
6935 			    /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */
6936 			    /* but skip block for "} else {" */
6937 			    l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
6938 			    if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l))
6939 				goto term_again;
6940 			    ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6941 			}
6942 		    }
6943 		}
6944 	    }
6945 	}
6946       }
6947 
6948       /* add extra indent for a comment */
6949       if (cin_iscomment(theline))
6950 	  amount += ind_comment;
6951     }
6952 
6953     /*
6954      * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all!
6955      *
6956      * this means we're at the top level, and everything should
6957      * basically just match where the previous line is, except
6958      * for the lines immediately following a function declaration,
6959      * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented.
6960      */
6961     else
6962     {
6963 	/*
6964 	 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any
6965 	 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start
6966 	 * of a function
6967 	 */
6968 
6969 	if (theline[0] == '{')
6970 	{
6971 	    amount = ind_first_open;
6972 	}
6973 
6974 	/*
6975 	 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current
6976 	 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec.
6977 	 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment
6978 	 * or if the current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';'.
6979 	 */
6980 	else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count
6981 		&& !cin_nocode(theline)
6982 		&& !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL)
6983 		&& !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL)
6984 		&& cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1)
6985 		&& !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE))
6986 	{
6987 	    amount = ind_func_type;
6988 	}
6989 	else
6990 	{
6991 	    amount = 0;
6992 	    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
6993 
6994 	    /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */
6995 
6996 	    while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6997 	    {
6998 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
6999 		curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7000 
7001 		l = ml_get_curline();
7002 
7003 		/*
7004 		 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
7005 		 */						/* XXX */
7006 		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7007 		{
7008 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7009 		    continue;
7010 		}
7011 
7012 		/*
7013 		 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or constructor
7014 		 * initialization?
7015 		 */						    /* XXX */
7016 		if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{'
7017 					     && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
7018 		{
7019 		    if (col == 0)
7020 		    {
7021 			amount = get_indent() + ind_cpp_baseclass;  /* XXX */
7022 			if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7023 				&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7024 					ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7025 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum)
7026 					   + ind_cpp_baseclass;	    /* XXX */
7027 		    }
7028 		    else
7029 		    {
7030 			curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
7031 			getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
7032 			amount = (int)col;
7033 		    }
7034 		    break;
7035 		}
7036 
7037 		/*
7038 		 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
7039 		 */
7040 		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7041 		    continue;
7042 
7043 		if (cin_nocode(l))
7044 		    continue;
7045 
7046 		/*
7047 		 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of
7048 		 * indentation:
7049 		 * int foo,
7050 		 *     bar;
7051 		 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg.
7052 		 * enum foobar
7053 		 * {
7054 		 *   ...
7055 		 * } foo,
7056 		 *   bar;
7057 		 */
7058 		n = 0;
7059 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7060 			     || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\'))
7061 		{
7062 		    /* take us back to opening paren */
7063 		    if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7064 			    && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7065 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7066 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7067 
7068 		    /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go
7069 		     * back to the first line with a backslash:
7070 		     * char *foo = "bla\
7071 		     *		 bla",
7072 		     *      here;
7073 		     */
7074 		    while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7075 		    {
7076 			l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7077 			if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
7078 			    break;
7079 			--curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7080 		    }
7081 
7082 		    amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7083 
7084 		    if (amount == 0)
7085 			amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7086 		    if (amount == 0)
7087 			amount = ind_continuation;
7088 		    break;
7089 		}
7090 
7091 		/*
7092 		 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're
7093 		 * not in a comment, put it the left margin.
7094 		 */
7095 		if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum))  /* XXX */
7096 		    break;
7097 		l = ml_get_curline();
7098 
7099 		/*
7100 		 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function.  Put
7101 		 * current line at the left margin.  For when 'cino' has "fs".
7102 		 */
7103 		if (*skipwhite(l) == '}')
7104 		    break;
7105 
7106 		/*			    (matching {)
7107 		 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by
7108 		 * comments) align at column 0.  For example:
7109 		 * char *string_array[] = { "foo",
7110 		 *     / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * /
7111 		 */
7112 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL))
7113 		    break;
7114 
7115 		/*
7116 		 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current
7117 		 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as
7118 		 * parameters.
7119 		 */
7120 		if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7121 		{
7122 		    amount = ind_param;
7123 		    break;
7124 		}
7125 
7126 		/*
7127 		 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the
7128 		 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero:
7129 		 * int foo,
7130 		 *     bar;
7131 		 * indent_to_0 here;
7132 		 */
7133 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u*)";", NULL))
7134 		{
7135 		    l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7136 		    if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7137 			    || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\'))
7138 			break;
7139 		    l = ml_get_curline();
7140 		}
7141 
7142 		/*
7143 		 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just
7144 		 * use the indent of this line.
7145 		 *
7146 		 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
7147 		 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
7148 		 */
7149 		find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
7150 
7151 		if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7152 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7153 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7154 		amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7155 		break;
7156 	    }
7157 
7158 	    /* add extra indent for a comment */
7159 	    if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7160 		amount += ind_comment;
7161 
7162 	    /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash:
7163 	     *	      "asdfasdf\
7164 	     *		  here";
7165 	     *	    char *foo = "asdf\
7166 	     *			 here";
7167 	     */
7168 	    if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1)
7169 	    {
7170 		l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7171 		if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7172 		{
7173 		    cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7174 		    if (cur_amount > 0)
7175 			amount = cur_amount;
7176 		    else if (cur_amount == 0)
7177 			amount += ind_continuation;
7178 		}
7179 	    }
7180 	}
7181     }
7182 
7183 theend:
7184     /* put the cursor back where it belongs */
7185     curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7186 
7187     vim_free(linecopy);
7188 
7189     if (amount < 0)
7190 	return 0;
7191     return amount;
7192 }
7193 
7194     static int
7195 find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
7196     int		lookfor;
7197     linenr_T	ourscope;
7198     int		ind_maxparen;
7199     int		ind_maxcomment;
7200 {
7201     char_u	*look;
7202     pos_T	*theirscope;
7203     char_u	*mightbeif;
7204     int		elselevel;
7205     int		whilelevel;
7206 
7207     if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7208     {
7209 	elselevel = 1;
7210 	whilelevel = 0;
7211     }
7212     else
7213     {
7214 	elselevel = 0;
7215 	whilelevel = 1;
7216     }
7217 
7218     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7219 
7220     while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1)
7221     {
7222 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7223 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7224 
7225 	look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7226 	if (cin_iselse(look)
7227 		|| cin_isif(look)
7228 		|| cin_isdo(look)			    /* XXX */
7229 		|| cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7230 	{
7231 	    /*
7232 	     * if we've gone outside the braces entirely,
7233 	     * we must be out of scope...
7234 	     */
7235 	    theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);  /* XXX */
7236 	    if (theirscope == NULL)
7237 		break;
7238 
7239 	    /*
7240 	     * and if the brace enclosing this is further
7241 	     * back than the one enclosing the else, we're
7242 	     * out of luck too.
7243 	     */
7244 	    if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope)
7245 		break;
7246 
7247 	    /*
7248 	     * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace,
7249 	     * then we can ignore it because it's in a
7250 	     * different scope...
7251 	     */
7252 	    if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope)
7253 		continue;
7254 
7255 	    /*
7256 	     * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if")
7257 	     * then we need to go back to another if, so
7258 	     * increment elselevel
7259 	     */
7260 	    look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7261 	    if (cin_iselse(look))
7262 	    {
7263 		mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4);
7264 		if (!cin_isif(mightbeif))
7265 		    ++elselevel;
7266 		continue;
7267 	    }
7268 
7269 	    /*
7270 	     * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to
7271 	     * another "do", so increment whilelevel.  XXX
7272 	     */
7273 	    if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7274 	    {
7275 		++whilelevel;
7276 		continue;
7277 	    }
7278 
7279 	    /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */
7280 	    look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7281 	    if (cin_isif(look))
7282 	    {
7283 		elselevel--;
7284 		/*
7285 		 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that
7286 		 * get in the way.
7287 		 */
7288 		if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7289 		    whilelevel = 0;
7290 	    }
7291 
7292 	    /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */
7293 	    if (cin_isdo(look))
7294 		whilelevel--;
7295 
7296 	    /*
7297 	     * if we've used up all the elses, then
7298 	     * this must be the if that we want!
7299 	     * match the indent level of that if.
7300 	     */
7301 	    if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0)
7302 	    {
7303 		return OK;
7304 	    }
7305 	}
7306     }
7307     return FAIL;
7308 }
7309 
7310 # if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
7311 /*
7312  * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'.
7313  */
7314     int
7315 get_expr_indent()
7316 {
7317     int		indent;
7318     pos_T	pos;
7319     int		save_State;
7320 
7321     pos = curwin->w_cursor;
7322     set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7323     ++sandbox;
7324     indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde);
7325     --sandbox;
7326 
7327     /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to.
7328      * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o"
7329      * command. */
7330     save_State = State;
7331     State = INSERT;
7332     curwin->w_cursor = pos;
7333     check_cursor();
7334     State = save_State;
7335 
7336     /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */
7337     if (indent < 0)
7338 	indent = get_indent();
7339 
7340     return indent;
7341 }
7342 # endif
7343 
7344 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */
7345 
7346 #if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO)
7347 
7348 static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p));
7349 
7350     static int
7351 lisp_match(p)
7352     char_u	*p;
7353 {
7354     char_u	buf[LSIZE];
7355     int		len;
7356     char_u	*word = p_lispwords;
7357 
7358     while (*word != NUL)
7359     {
7360 	(void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ",");
7361 	len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
7362 	if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ')
7363 	    return TRUE;
7364     }
7365     return FALSE;
7366 }
7367 
7368 /*
7369  * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used.
7370  * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting
7371  * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still
7372  * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, [email protected]
7373  *
7374  * TODO:
7375  * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch
7376  * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented:
7377  * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals
7378  * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon
7379  * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal
7380  * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases.
7381  * Update from Sergey Khorev:
7382  * I tried to fix the first two issues.
7383  */
7384     int
7385 get_lisp_indent()
7386 {
7387     pos_T	*pos, realpos, paren;
7388     int		amount;
7389     char_u	*that;
7390     colnr_T	col;
7391     colnr_T	firsttry;
7392     int		parencount, quotecount;
7393     int		vi_lisp;
7394 
7395     /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */
7396     vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL);
7397 
7398     realpos = curwin->w_cursor;
7399     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7400 
7401     if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL)
7402 	pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7403     else
7404     {
7405 	paren = *pos;
7406 	pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7407 	if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren))
7408 	    pos = &paren;
7409     }
7410     if (pos != NULL)
7411     {
7412 	/* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white
7413 	 * line that is at the same () level. */
7414 	amount = -1;
7415 	parencount = 0;
7416 
7417 	while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum)
7418 	{
7419 	    if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7420 		continue;
7421 	    for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that)
7422 	    {
7423 		if (*that == ';')
7424 		{
7425 		    while (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7426 			++that;
7427 		    continue;
7428 		}
7429 		if (*that == '\\')
7430 		{
7431 		    if (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7432 			++that;
7433 		    continue;
7434 		}
7435 		if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL)
7436 		{
7437 		    that++;
7438 		    while (*that && (*that != '"' || *(that - 1) == '\\'))
7439 			++that;
7440 		}
7441 		if (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7442 		    ++parencount;
7443 		else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']')
7444 		    --parencount;
7445 	    }
7446 	    if (parencount == 0)
7447 	    {
7448 		amount = get_indent();
7449 		break;
7450 	    }
7451 	}
7452 
7453 	if (amount == -1)
7454 	{
7455 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
7456 	    curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col;
7457 	    col = pos->col;
7458 
7459 	    that = ml_get_curline();
7460 
7461 	    if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0)
7462 		amount = 2;
7463 	    else
7464 	    {
7465 		amount = 0;
7466 		while (*that && col)
7467 		{
7468 		    amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount);
7469 		    col--;
7470 		}
7471 
7472 		/*
7473 		 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the
7474 		 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms):
7475 		 *
7476 		 * (let ((a 1))    instead    (let ((a 1))
7477 		 *   (...))	      of	   (...))
7478 		 */
7479 
7480 		if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7481 						      && lisp_match(that + 1))
7482 		    amount += 2;
7483 		else
7484 		{
7485 		    that++;
7486 		    amount++;
7487 		    firsttry = amount;
7488 
7489 		    while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7490 		    {
7491 			amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7492 			++that;
7493 		    }
7494 
7495 		    if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */
7496 		    {
7497 			/* test *that != '(' to accomodate first let/do
7498 			 * argument if it is more than one line */
7499 			if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[')
7500 			    firsttry++;
7501 
7502 			parencount = 0;
7503 			quotecount = 0;
7504 
7505 			if (vi_lisp
7506 				|| (*that != '"'
7507 				    && *that != '\''
7508 				    && *that != '#'
7509 				    && (*that < '0' || *that > '9')))
7510 			{
7511 			    while (*that
7512 				    && (!vim_iswhite(*that)
7513 					|| quotecount
7514 					|| parencount)
7515 				    && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7516 					    && !quotecount
7517 					    && !parencount
7518 					    && vi_lisp)))
7519 			    {
7520 				if (*that == '"')
7521 				    quotecount = !quotecount;
7522 				if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7523 							       && !quotecount)
7524 				    ++parencount;
7525 				if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']')
7526 							       && !quotecount)
7527 				    --parencount;
7528 				if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL)
7529 				    amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7530 							     (colnr_T)amount);
7531 				amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7532 							     (colnr_T)amount);
7533 			    }
7534 			}
7535 			while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7536 			{
7537 			    amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7538 			    that++;
7539 			}
7540 			if (!*that || *that == ';')
7541 			    amount = firsttry;
7542 		    }
7543 		}
7544 	    }
7545 	}
7546     }
7547     else
7548 	amount = 0;	/* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */
7549 
7550     curwin->w_cursor = realpos;
7551 
7552     return amount;
7553 }
7554 #endif /* FEAT_LISP */
7555 
7556     void
7557 prepare_to_exit()
7558 {
7559 #ifdef FEAT_GUI
7560     if (gui.in_use)
7561     {
7562 	gui.dying = TRUE;
7563 	out_trash();	/* trash any pending output */
7564     }
7565     else
7566 #endif
7567     {
7568 	windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0);
7569 
7570 	/*
7571 	 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal"
7572 	 * screen (if there are two screens).
7573 	 */
7574 	settmode(TMODE_COOK);
7575 #ifdef WIN3264
7576 	if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE)
7577 #endif
7578 	    stoptermcap();
7579 	out_flush();
7580     }
7581 }
7582 
7583 /*
7584  * Preserve files and exit.
7585  * When called IObuff must contain a message.
7586  */
7587     void
7588 preserve_exit()
7589 {
7590     buf_T	*buf;
7591 
7592     prepare_to_exit();
7593 
7594     out_str(IObuff);
7595     screen_start();		    /* don't know where cursor is now */
7596     out_flush();
7597 
7598     ml_close_notmod();		    /* close all not-modified buffers */
7599 
7600     for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next)
7601     {
7602 	if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL)
7603 	{
7604 	    OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n"));
7605 	    screen_start();	    /* don't know where cursor is now */
7606 	    out_flush();
7607 	    ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE);	/* preserve all swap files */
7608 	    break;
7609 	}
7610     }
7611 
7612     ml_close_all(FALSE);	    /* close all memfiles, without deleting */
7613 
7614     OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n"));
7615 
7616     getout(1);
7617 }
7618 
7619 /*
7620  * return TRUE if "fname" exists.
7621  */
7622     int
7623 vim_fexists(fname)
7624     char_u  *fname;
7625 {
7626     struct stat st;
7627 
7628     if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st))
7629 	return FALSE;
7630     return TRUE;
7631 }
7632 
7633 /*
7634  * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while.
7635  * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for
7636  * each line in the file.  Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much
7637  * time, because it can be a system call.
7638  */
7639 
7640 #ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP
7641 # ifdef FEAT_GUI		    /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */
7642 #  define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200
7643 # else
7644 #  define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32
7645 # endif
7646 #endif
7647 
7648 static int	breakcheck_count = 0;
7649 
7650     void
7651 line_breakcheck()
7652 {
7653     if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP)
7654     {
7655 	breakcheck_count = 0;
7656 	ui_breakcheck();
7657     }
7658 }
7659 
7660 /*
7661  * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often.
7662  */
7663     void
7664 fast_breakcheck()
7665 {
7666     if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10)
7667     {
7668 	breakcheck_count = 0;
7669 	ui_breakcheck();
7670     }
7671 }
7672 
7673 /*
7674  * Expand wildcards.  Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching
7675  * 'wildignore'.
7676  */
7677     int
7678 expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
7679     int		   num_pat;	/* number of input patterns */
7680     char_u	 **pat;		/* array of input patterns */
7681     int		  *num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
7682     char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
7683     int		   flags;	/* EW_DIR, etc. */
7684 {
7685     int		retval;
7686     int		i, j;
7687     char_u	*p;
7688     int		non_suf_match;	/* number without matching suffix */
7689 
7690     retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
7691 
7692     /* When keeping all matches, return here */
7693     if (flags & EW_KEEPALL)
7694 	return retval;
7695 
7696 #ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN
7697     /*
7698      * Remove names that match 'wildignore'.
7699      */
7700     if (*p_wig)
7701     {
7702 	char_u	*ffname;
7703 
7704 	/* check all files in (*file)[] */
7705 	for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
7706 	{
7707 	    ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE);
7708 	    if (ffname == NULL)		/* out of memory */
7709 		break;
7710 # ifdef VMS
7711 	    vms_remove_version(ffname);
7712 # endif
7713 	    if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname))
7714 	    {
7715 		/* remove this matching file from the list */
7716 		vim_free((*file)[i]);
7717 		for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j)
7718 		    (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1];
7719 		--*num_file;
7720 		--i;
7721 	    }
7722 	    vim_free(ffname);
7723 	}
7724     }
7725 #endif
7726 
7727     /*
7728      * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end.
7729      */
7730     if (*num_file > 1)
7731     {
7732 	non_suf_match = 0;
7733 	for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
7734 	{
7735 	    if (!match_suffix((*file)[i]))
7736 	    {
7737 		/*
7738 		 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front
7739 		 * of the list.
7740 		 */
7741 		p = (*file)[i];
7742 		for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j)
7743 		    (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1];
7744 		(*file)[non_suf_match++] = p;
7745 	    }
7746 	}
7747     }
7748 
7749     return retval;
7750 }
7751 
7752 /*
7753  * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'.
7754  */
7755     int
7756 match_suffix(fname)
7757     char_u	*fname;
7758 {
7759     int		fnamelen, setsuflen;
7760     char_u	*setsuf;
7761 #define MAXSUFLEN 30	    /* maximum length of a file suffix */
7762     char_u	suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN];
7763 
7764     fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname);
7765     setsuflen = 0;
7766     for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; )
7767     {
7768 	setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,");
7769 	if (fnamelen >= setsuflen
7770 		&& fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen,
7771 					      (size_t)setsuflen) == 0)
7772 	    break;
7773 	setsuflen = 0;
7774     }
7775     return (setsuflen != 0);
7776 }
7777 
7778 #if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO)
7779 
7780 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
7781 static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p));
7782 static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags));
7783 # endif
7784 
7785 # if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264)
7786 /*
7787  * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32.  It's here because
7788  * it's shared between these systems.
7789  */
7790 # if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO)
7791 #  define _cdecl	    /* DJGPP doesn't have this */
7792 # else
7793 #  ifdef __BORLANDC__
7794 #   define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF
7795 #  endif
7796 # endif
7797 
7798 /*
7799  * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath()
7800  */
7801     static int _cdecl
7802 pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b)
7803 {
7804     return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b));
7805 }
7806 
7807 # ifndef WIN3264
7808     static void
7809 namelowcpy(
7810     char_u *d,
7811     char_u *s)
7812 {
7813 #  ifdef DJGPP
7814     if (USE_LONG_FNAME)	    /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */
7815 	while (*s)
7816 	    *d++ = *s++;
7817     else
7818 #  endif
7819 	while (*s)
7820 	    *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++);
7821     *d = NUL;
7822 }
7823 # endif
7824 
7825 /*
7826  * Recursively build up a list of files in "gap" matching the first wildcard
7827  * in `path'.  Called by expand_wildcards().
7828  * Return the number of matches found.
7829  * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
7830  * at "path[wildoff]".
7831  */
7832     static int
7833 dos_expandpath(
7834     garray_T	*gap,
7835     char_u	*path,
7836     int		wildoff,
7837     int		flags)		/* EW_* flags */
7838 {
7839     char_u		*buf;
7840     char_u		*path_end;
7841     char_u		*p, *s, *e;
7842     int			start_len = gap->ga_len;
7843     int			ok;
7844 #ifdef WIN3264
7845     WIN32_FIND_DATA	fb;
7846     HANDLE		hFind = (HANDLE)0;
7847 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
7848     WIN32_FIND_DATAW    wfb;
7849     WCHAR		*wn = NULL;	/* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */
7850 # endif
7851 #else
7852     struct ffblk	fb;
7853 #endif
7854     int			matches;
7855     int			starts_with_dot;
7856     int			len;
7857     char_u		*pat;
7858     regmatch_T		regmatch;
7859     char_u		*matchname;
7860 
7861     /* make room for file name */
7862     buf = alloc((unsigned int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
7863     if (buf == NULL)
7864 	return 0;
7865 
7866     /*
7867      * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1.
7868      * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters.
7869      */
7870     p = buf;
7871     s = buf;
7872     e = NULL;
7873     path_end = path;
7874     while (*path_end != NUL)
7875     {
7876 	/* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
7877 	 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
7878 	if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
7879 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
7880 	else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/')
7881 	{
7882 	    if (e != NULL)
7883 		break;
7884 	    s = p + 1;
7885 	}
7886 	else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
7887 			 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL)
7888 	    e = p;
7889 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
7890 	if (has_mbyte)
7891 	{
7892 	    len = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(path_end);
7893 	    STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
7894 	    p += len;
7895 	    path_end += len;
7896 	}
7897 	else
7898 #endif
7899 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
7900     }
7901     e = p;
7902     *e = NUL;
7903 
7904     /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */
7905     /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
7906      * component. */
7907     for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
7908 	if (rem_backslash(p))
7909 	{
7910 	    STRCPY(p, p + 1);
7911 	    --e;
7912 	    --s;
7913 	}
7914 
7915     starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
7916     pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
7917     if (pat == NULL)
7918     {
7919 	vim_free(buf);
7920 	return 0;
7921     }
7922 
7923     /* compile the regexp into a program */
7924     regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE;		/* Always ignore case */
7925     regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
7926     vim_free(pat);
7927 
7928     if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
7929     {
7930 	vim_free(buf);
7931 	return 0;
7932     }
7933 
7934     /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */
7935     matchname = vim_strsave(s);
7936 
7937     /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */
7938     STRCPY(s, "*.*");
7939 #ifdef WIN3264
7940 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
7941     if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage)
7942     {
7943 	/* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'.  Attempt using the
7944 	 * wide function.  If it fails because it is not implemented fall back
7945 	 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */
7946 	wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
7947 	if (wn != NULL)
7948 	{
7949 	    hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
7950 	    if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE
7951 			      && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED)
7952 	    {
7953 		vim_free(wn);
7954 		wn = NULL;
7955 	    }
7956 	}
7957     }
7958 
7959     if (wn == NULL)
7960 # endif
7961 	hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
7962     ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
7963 #else
7964     /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */
7965     ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
7966 		(*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
7967 #endif
7968 
7969     while (ok)
7970     {
7971 #ifdef WIN3264
7972 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
7973 	if (wn != NULL)
7974 	    p = ucs2_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL);   /* p is allocated here */
7975 	else
7976 # endif
7977 	    p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName;
7978 #else
7979 	p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name;
7980 #endif
7981 	/* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for.  Accept
7982 	 * all entries found with "matchname". */
7983 	if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
7984 		&& (matchname == NULL
7985 		    || vim_regexec(&regmatch, p, (colnr_T)0)))
7986 	{
7987 #ifdef WIN3264
7988 	    STRCPY(s, p);
7989 #else
7990 	    namelowcpy(s, p);
7991 #endif
7992 	    len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
7993 	    STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
7994 	    if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end))
7995 	    {
7996 		/* need to expand another component of the path */
7997 		/* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
7998 		(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags);
7999 	    }
8000 	    else
8001 	    {
8002 		/* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8003 		/* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8004 		if (*path_end != 0)
8005 		    backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8006 		if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0)	/* add existing file */
8007 		    addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8008 	    }
8009 	}
8010 
8011 #ifdef WIN3264
8012 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8013 	if (wn != NULL)
8014 	{
8015 	    vim_free(p);
8016 	    ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb);
8017 	}
8018 	else
8019 # endif
8020 	    ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb);
8021 #else
8022 	ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0);
8023 #endif
8024 
8025 	/* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name
8026 	 * itself.  Finds the long name of a short filename. */
8027 	if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len)
8028 	{
8029 	    STRCPY(s, matchname);
8030 #ifdef WIN3264
8031 	    FindClose(hFind);
8032 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8033 	    if (wn != NULL)
8034 	    {
8035 		vim_free(wn);
8036 		wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8037 		if (wn != NULL)
8038 		    hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8039 	    }
8040 	    if (wn == NULL)
8041 # endif
8042 		hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8043 	    ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8044 #else
8045 	    ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8046 		 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8047 #endif
8048 	    vim_free(matchname);
8049 	    matchname = NULL;
8050 	}
8051     }
8052 
8053 #ifdef WIN3264
8054     FindClose(hFind);
8055 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8056     vim_free(wn);
8057 # endif
8058 #endif
8059     vim_free(buf);
8060     vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
8061     vim_free(matchname);
8062 
8063     matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
8064     if (matches > 0)
8065 	qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches,
8066 						   sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
8067     return matches;
8068 }
8069 
8070     int
8071 mch_expandpath(
8072     garray_T	*gap,
8073     char_u	*path,
8074     int		flags)		/* EW_* flags */
8075 {
8076     return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags);
8077 }
8078 # endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */
8079 
8080 /*
8081  * Generic wildcard expansion code.
8082  *
8083  * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a
8084  * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*"
8085  *
8086  * Return FAIL when no single file was found.  In this case "num_file" is not
8087  * set, and "file" may contain an error message.
8088  * Return OK when some files found.  "num_file" is set to the number of
8089  * matches, "file" to the array of matches.  Call FreeWild() later.
8090  */
8091     int
8092 gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8093     int		num_pat;	/* number of input patterns */
8094     char_u	**pat;		/* array of input patterns */
8095     int		*num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
8096     char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
8097     int		flags;		/* EW_* flags */
8098 {
8099     int			i;
8100     garray_T		ga;
8101     char_u		*p;
8102     static int		recursive = FALSE;
8103     int			add_pat;
8104 
8105     /*
8106      * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user".  If this fails,
8107      * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here.  In this case, always
8108      * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible.  Otherwise,
8109      * return FAIL.
8110      */
8111     if (recursive)
8112 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8113 	return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8114 #else
8115 	return FAIL;
8116 #endif
8117 
8118 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8119     /*
8120      * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle
8121      * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion.  This
8122      * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately.
8123      * For `=expr` do use the internal function.
8124      */
8125     for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++)
8126     {
8127 	if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL
8128 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8129 		&& !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=')
8130 # endif
8131 	   )
8132 	    return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8133     }
8134 #endif
8135 
8136     recursive = TRUE;
8137 
8138     /*
8139      * The matching file names are stored in a growarray.  Init it empty.
8140      */
8141     ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30);
8142 
8143     for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i)
8144     {
8145 	add_pat = -1;
8146 	p = pat[i];
8147 
8148 #ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8149 	if (vim_backtick(p))
8150 	    add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags);
8151 	else
8152 #endif
8153 	{
8154 	    /*
8155 	     * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/".
8156 	     */
8157 	    if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8158 	    {
8159 		p = expand_env_save(p);
8160 		if (p == NULL)
8161 		    p = pat[i];
8162 #ifdef UNIX
8163 		/*
8164 		 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment
8165 		 * variable, use the shell to do that.  Discard previously
8166 		 * found file names and start all over again.
8167 		 */
8168 		else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8169 		{
8170 		    vim_free(p);
8171 		    ga_clear(&ga);
8172 		    i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file,
8173 								       flags);
8174 		    recursive = FALSE;
8175 		    return i;
8176 		}
8177 #endif
8178 	    }
8179 
8180 	    /*
8181 	     * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to
8182 	     * the list.  If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add
8183 	     * the pattern.
8184 	     * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or
8185 	     * when EW_NOTFOUND is given.
8186 	     */
8187 	    if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p))
8188 		add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags);
8189 	}
8190 
8191 	if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)))
8192 	{
8193 	    char_u	*t = backslash_halve_save(p);
8194 
8195 #if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC)
8196 	    slash_to_colon(t);
8197 #endif
8198 	    /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs.  Makes
8199 	     * "vim c:/" work. */
8200 	    if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)
8201 		addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE);
8202 	    else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0)
8203 		addfile(&ga, t, flags);
8204 	    vim_free(t);
8205 	}
8206 
8207 	if (p != pat[i])
8208 	    vim_free(p);
8209     }
8210 
8211     *num_file = ga.ga_len;
8212     *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)"";
8213 
8214     recursive = FALSE;
8215 
8216     return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL;
8217 }
8218 
8219 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8220 
8221 /*
8222  * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here.
8223  */
8224     static int
8225 vim_backtick(p)
8226     char_u	*p;
8227 {
8228     return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`');
8229 }
8230 
8231 /*
8232  * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command.
8233  * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `.
8234  * Returns number of file names found.
8235  */
8236     static int
8237 expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags)
8238     garray_T	*gap;
8239     char_u	*pat;
8240     int		flags;	/* EW_* flags */
8241 {
8242     char_u	*p;
8243     char_u	*cmd;
8244     char_u	*buffer;
8245     int		cnt = 0;
8246     int		i;
8247 
8248     /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */
8249     cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2);
8250     if (cmd == NULL)
8251 	return 0;
8252 
8253 #ifdef FEAT_EVAL
8254     if (*cmd == '=')	    /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */
8255 	buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p);
8256     else
8257 #endif
8258 	buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0);
8259     vim_free(cmd);
8260     if (buffer == NULL)
8261 	return 0;
8262 
8263     cmd = buffer;
8264     while (*cmd != NUL)
8265     {
8266 	cmd = skipwhite(cmd);		/* skip over white space */
8267 	p = cmd;
8268 	while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */
8269 	    ++p;
8270 	/* add an entry if it is not empty */
8271 	if (p > cmd)
8272 	{
8273 	    i = *p;
8274 	    *p = NUL;
8275 	    addfile(gap, cmd, flags);
8276 	    *p = i;
8277 	    ++cnt;
8278 	}
8279 	cmd = p;
8280 	while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n'))
8281 	    ++cmd;
8282     }
8283 
8284     vim_free(buffer);
8285     return cnt;
8286 }
8287 # endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */
8288 
8289 /*
8290  * Add a file to a file list.  Accepted flags:
8291  * EW_DIR	add directories
8292  * EW_FILE	add files
8293  * EW_NOTFOUND	add even when it doesn't exist
8294  * EW_ADDSLASH	add slash after directory name
8295  */
8296     void
8297 addfile(gap, f, flags)
8298     garray_T	*gap;
8299     char_u	*f;	/* filename */
8300     int		flags;
8301 {
8302     char_u	*p;
8303     int		isdir;
8304 
8305     /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */
8306     if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0)
8307 	return;
8308 
8309 #ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL
8310     /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */
8311     if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL)
8312 	return;
8313 #endif
8314 
8315     isdir = mch_isdir(f);
8316     if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE)))
8317 	return;
8318 
8319     /* Make room for another item in the file list. */
8320     if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL)
8321 	return;
8322 
8323     p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir));
8324     if (p == NULL)
8325 	return;
8326 
8327     STRCPY(p, f);
8328 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
8329     slash_adjust(p);
8330 #endif
8331     /*
8332      * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present.
8333      */
8334 #ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR
8335     if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH))
8336 	add_pathsep(p);
8337 #endif
8338     ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p;
8339     --gap->ga_room;
8340 }
8341 #endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */
8342 
8343 #if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
8344 
8345 #ifndef SEEK_SET
8346 # define SEEK_SET 0
8347 #endif
8348 #ifndef SEEK_END
8349 # define SEEK_END 2
8350 #endif
8351 
8352 /*
8353  * Get the stdout of an external command.
8354  * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error.
8355  */
8356     char_u *
8357 get_cmd_output(cmd, flags)
8358     char_u	*cmd;
8359     int		flags;		/* can be SHELL_SILENT */
8360 {
8361     char_u	*tempname;
8362     char_u	*command;
8363     char_u	*buffer = NULL;
8364     int		len;
8365     int		i = 0;
8366     FILE	*fd;
8367 
8368     if (check_restricted() || check_secure())
8369 	return NULL;
8370 
8371     /* get a name for the temp file */
8372     if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL)
8373     {
8374 	EMSG(_(e_notmp));
8375 	return NULL;
8376     }
8377 
8378     /* Add the redirection stuff */
8379     command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, NULL, tempname);
8380     if (command == NULL)
8381 	goto done;
8382 
8383     /*
8384      * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored).
8385      * Don't check timestamps here.
8386      */
8387     ++no_check_timestamps;
8388     call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags);
8389     --no_check_timestamps;
8390 
8391     vim_free(command);
8392 
8393     /*
8394      * read the names from the file into memory
8395      */
8396 # ifdef VMS
8397     /* created temporary file is not allways readable as binary */
8398     fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r");
8399 # else
8400     fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN);
8401 # endif
8402 
8403     if (fd == NULL)
8404     {
8405 	EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname);
8406 	goto done;
8407     }
8408 
8409     fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END);
8410     len = ftell(fd);		    /* get size of temp file */
8411     fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET);
8412 
8413     buffer = alloc(len + 1);
8414     if (buffer != NULL)
8415 	i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd);
8416     fclose(fd);
8417     mch_remove(tempname);
8418     if (buffer == NULL)
8419 	goto done;
8420 #ifdef VMS
8421     len = i;	/* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */
8422 #endif
8423     if (i != len)
8424     {
8425 	EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname);
8426 	vim_free(buffer);
8427 	buffer = NULL;
8428     }
8429     else
8430 	buffer[len] = '\0';	/* make sure the buffer is terminated */
8431 
8432 done:
8433     vim_free(tempname);
8434     return buffer;
8435 }
8436 #endif
8437 
8438 /*
8439  * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion
8440  * functions.
8441  */
8442     void
8443 FreeWild(count, files)
8444     int	    count;
8445     char_u  **files;
8446 {
8447     if (files == NULL || count <= 0)
8448 	return;
8449 #if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */
8450     /*
8451      * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have
8452      * been used???
8453      */
8454     _fnexplodefree((char **)files);
8455 #else
8456     while (count--)
8457 	vim_free(files[count]);
8458     vim_free(files);
8459 #endif
8460 }
8461 
8462 /*
8463  * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'.
8464  * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping.
8465  * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command.
8466  */
8467     int
8468 goto_im()
8469 {
8470     return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed());
8471 }
8472